OWNER’S
MANUAL
Altea
5P0012720BA
Inglés
5P0012720BA (10.13) (GT9)
Altea Inglés (10.13)
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com-
prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehículo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y
la técnica. Por esta razón, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basándose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente
Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la información en el momento de la realización de la
impresión. Salvo error u omisión, la información recogida en el presente manual es válida en la fecha de cierre de su edición.
No está permitida la reimpresión, la reproducción o la traducción, total o parcial, sin la autorización escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos según la ley sobre el “Copyright”. Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificación.
❀
Este papel está fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
© SEAT S.A. - Reimpresión: 15.10.13
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself
with your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help preserve its value.
For safety reasons, always note the information concerning accessories, modifications and part replace-
ments.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the
vehicle.
Table of Contents
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . . 10
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Digital instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Instrument panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Rear vision mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Seats and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . . . 134
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment* . . 148
Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and power sockets . 150
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher . 154
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Start-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox* . . . 183
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Parking aid acoustic system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cruise speed* (Cruise control system) . . . . . . . . 193
Practical Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Anti-lock brake and traction control systems M-
ABS (ABS and ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Economical and environmentally friendly driving 206
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
3Table of Contents
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . 214
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Accessories, replacement of parts and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
LPG system (Liquefied petroleum gas)* . . . . . . . 230
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . 235
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . . 244
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Vehicle tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . 262
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* . . . . . . . . . 269
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 HP) Start-Stop petrol engine 299
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 66 kW (90 PS) with/
without DPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) with/
without DPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS) . . . . . 305
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS) . . . . . 306
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
4 Table of Contents
5About this manual
About this manual
What you should know before reading this manual
This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the ve-
hicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA range, some of the equip-
ment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all
types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified in accordance
with technical or market requirements; this cannot be interpreted as dis-
honest advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual re-
fer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when oth-
erwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is fitted as standard only in
certain versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some ver-
sions, or are only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright sym-
bol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
The section is continued on the following page.
Marks the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn
you about possible dangers of accident or injury.
®
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage
to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain relevant information concerning envi-
ronmental protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
6 Content
Content
This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organ-
ised way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong
to chapters (e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire manual is divided into five
large parts which are:
1. Safety First
Information about the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as
seat belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Operating instructions
Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the vehicle interior, etc.
3. Practical Tips
Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical specifications
Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index
At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will
help you to quickly find the information you require.
7Safe driving
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own
safety and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
● This manual contains important information about the operation of
the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of
the on-board documentation also contain further information that you
should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passen-
gers.
● Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all
times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to
another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection
system and can reduce the risk of injury in the event of acci-
dent.
Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury.
The following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
● Three-point seat belts
● Belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats
● Belt tensioners for the front seats
● Belt height adjustment for the front seats
● Front airbags
● Side airbags in the front seat backrests
● Curtain airbags
● Active front head restraints*
● ISOFIX anchorage points for child seats in the rear side seats with the
ISOFIX system
● Height-adjustable front head restraints
● Head restraints with in-use position and non-use position
● Adjustable steering column
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and
your passengers with the best possible protection in the event of an acci-
dent. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
8 Safe driving
passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment proper-
ly.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so impor-
tant, how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how
you and your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the
safety equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you
and your passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before setting off
The driver is always responsible for the safety of the passen-
gers and the safe operation of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working
properly.
– Check tyre pressure.
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
– Make sure all luggage is secured ⇒ page 17.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and rear vision mirrors properly
according to your size.
– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the
head restraints in the in-use position ⇒ page 14.
– Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to
their height.
– Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly ap-
plied seat belts ⇒ page 46.
– Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers al-
so to assume a proper sitting position. ⇒ page 10.
– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to
fasten their seat belts properly. ⇒ page 19.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style
and the personal behaviour of all vehicle occupants.
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road
⇒
, for this reason:
– Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by pas-
sengers or telephone calls.
– Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medi-
cation, alcohol, drugs).
– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
9Safe driving
– Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
– When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
10 Safe driving
Proper sitting position for occupants
Correct sitting position for driver
The correct sitting position for the driver is important for
safe and relaxed driving.
Fig. 1 The correct dis-
tance between driver and
steering wheel
Fig. 2 Correct head re-
straint position for driver
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driv-
er:
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least
25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
⇒ Fig. 1.
– Move the driver seat forwards or backwards so that you are able
to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor
with your knees still slightly angled ⇒
.
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering
wheel.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the
same level as the top of your head ⇒ Fig. 2.
–
Move the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back
rests completely against it.
11Safe driving
– Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 19.
– Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle un-
der control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver seat ⇒ page 134.
WARNING
● An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between
the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel ⇒ Fig. 1. If
you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you
properly.
● If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the mini-
mum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
● When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces
the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any
other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if
the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and
head.
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking ma-
noeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The
airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when
the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her
seat belt correctly. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear,
the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web
or to the incorrect sitting position!
● Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Correct sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the
dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest pos-
sible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
– Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible ⇒
.
– Move the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back
rests completely against it.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the
same level as the top of your head ⇒ page 13.
– Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front pas-
senger seat.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 19.
It is possible to deactivate the front passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
stances ⇒ page 26.
Adjusting the front passenger seat ⇒ page 137.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
12 Safe driving
WARNING
● An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe
injuries.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm be-
tween your chest and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm,
the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
● If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the mini-
mum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
● Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving;
never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An in-
correct sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case
of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could
sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
● To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such as
sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the back-
rest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide op-
timal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front
passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incor-
rect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum pro-
tection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for
use and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking ma-
noeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear seat bench must
consider the following:
– Adjust the head restraint to the correct position ⇒ page 14.
– Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the rear seat.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 19.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take chil-
dren in the vehicle ⇒ page 46.
WARNING
● If the passengers in the rear seats are not sitting properly, they could
sustain severe injuries.
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum pro-
tection.
● Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when seat backrests
are in an upright position and the vehicle occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly. If passengers In the rear seats are not sitting in an
upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat
belt increases.
13Safe driving
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Fig. 3 Correctly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the front
Fig. 4 Correctly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the side
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum
protection.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
⇒ Fig. 3 and ⇒ Fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 134
WARNING
● Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event
of a collision or accident.
● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
● The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height
of the passenger.
Active head restraints*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision.
The resulting body pressure on the seat backrest activates the active head
restraint* on the front seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at
the same time. This movement reduces the distance between the occu-
pant's head and the head restraint, thus reducing the risk of head injuries
such as brain trauma.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
14 Safe driving
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted in-
creases the risk of severe injuries.
● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event
of a collision or accident.
● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
● The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height
of the passenger.
Note
The active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant ap-
plies a high level of pressure to the seat backrest (e.g. by “falling” back into
the seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat
head restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dan-
gerous, as the active head restraints will return to the original position im-
mediately and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
the passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries
in most accident situations
Fig. 5 Head restraints in
correct position
Fig. 6 Head restraint po-
sition warning label
15Safe driving
Rear outer seat head restraints
– The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.
– Two positions for use ⇒ Fig. 5. In these positions, the head re-
straints are used normally, protecting passengers along with
the rear seat belts.
– And one position for non-use.
– To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint
– The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
● Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the
head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label loca-
ted on the rear side fixed window ⇒ Fig. 6.
● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer
seat rear head restraints.
● Risk of injury in case of an accident!
CAUTION
Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints ⇒ page 135.
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to ve-
hicle occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs
are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially re-
duce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of
injury due to incorrect seat belt position. As the driver, you are re-
sponsible for all passengers, especially children.
– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒
.
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dan-
gerous for all vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like
to make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
● Never stand in the vehicle.
● Never stand on the seats.
● Never kneel on the seats.
● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
● Never lean against the dash panel.
● Never lie on the rear bench.
● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
● Never sit sideways.
● Never lean out of a window.
● Never put your feet out of a window.
● Never put your feet on the dash panel.
● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
● Do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
16 Safe driving
● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
● Do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
● Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the vehicle occupants to se-
vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant who
has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
● Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and
maintain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passen-
gers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip ⇒ page 10,
Proper sitting position for occupants.
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by ob-
jects or floor mats.
– Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
– Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial po-
sitions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely fas-
tened on the footwell.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
order to stop the vehicle.
Wearing suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
● Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driv-
ing.
● Never place objects on the driver footwell. An object could move into
the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driv-
ing or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake,
clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the footwell and do not impair operation of the pedals.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals ⇒
.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a speci-
alised dealership. Fasteners* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
17Safe driving
WARNING
● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious
injuries.
● Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original
floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the ped-
als. Risk of accident.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured
in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the driv-
ing safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment.
– Place the heavy objects first.
– Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings ⇒ page 18.
WARNING
● Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could
cause serious injuries.
● Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on
the fastening rings.
● Use suitable straps to secure heavy objects.
● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of
injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating
airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk
of fatal injury.
● Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident.
Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accord-
ingly, to avoid accidents.
● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight.
If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driv-
ing characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, inju-
ries and damage to the vehicle.
● Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the rear lid is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the
door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death.
● Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock
all the doors and rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the
vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.
● Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. All vehicle
occupants must have their seat belt fastened ⇒ page 19.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
18 Safe driving
Note
● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
● Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings*
There can be four fastening rings in the luggage compart-
ment for fastening luggage and other objects.
– Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings ⇒
in Loading the lug-
gage compartment on page 17.
– Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up
so much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of ki-
netic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the ob-
ject. The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. Dur-
ing a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph), this object generates
a force corresponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective
weight of the object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity
of the injuries which might be sustained if this object strikes an occupant as
it flies through the interior of the vehicle. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
● If pieces of luggage or other objects are secured to the fastening
rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could be
sustained in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
● To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward, al-
ways use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening
rings.
● Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
19Seat belts
Seat belts
Brief introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this section you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
– Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases.
● Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden
braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and all other
vehicle occupants must always wear the seat belts properly while the ve-
hicle is moving.
● Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use
seat belts. Like all other vehicle occupants, these people can also sustain
severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat
is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for four seats. Two front
seats and two rear seats.
WARNING
● Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your ve-
hicle.
● Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt
belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The control lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
– Fasten your seat belt securely.
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly be-
fore driving off.
– Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's
height and weight.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
20 Seat belts
After the ignition has been switched on, the warning lamp on the instru-
ment panel lights up
1)
if the driver has not fastened his/her seat belt. An
audible warning is heard if the vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h (19
mph).
The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while
the ignition is switched on.
1)
Depending on the model version
21Seat belts
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
Fig. 7 Vehicle about to
hit a wall: the occupants
are not wearing seat
belts
Fig. 8 The vehicle hits
the wall: the occupants
are not wearing seat
belts
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on
collision: When a vehicle starts moving
⇒
Fig. 7, a certain amount of energy
known as kinetic energy is produced in the vehicle and its occupants.
The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the
greater the weight, the more energy there is to be released in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the
speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example,
the corresponding kinetic energy is multiplied by four.
Because the vehicle occupants in our example are not restrained by seat
belts, all of the occupants' kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of
impact
⇒
Fig. 8.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting
on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater
speed these forces are even higher.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
22 Seat belts
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle.
In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehi-
cle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Fig. 9 A driver not wear-
ing a seat belt is thrown
forward violently
Fig. 10 The unbelted
passenger in the rear
seat is thrown forward vi-
olently, hitting the driver
wearing a seat belt
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great
that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal colli-
sion, unbelted vehicle occupants are thrown forward and will make violent
contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is
in the way ⇒ Fig. 9.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags
provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the driver) must
wear seat belts properly at all times during the trip. This will reduce the risk
of severe injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether an air-
bag is fitted for the seat or not.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible
protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be
protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as
they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interi-
or in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts
endanger not only themselves but also the front occupants ⇒ Fig. 10.
23Seat belts
Seat belt protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Fig. 11 A driver wearing
the seat belt properly is
secured by the belt in
sharp braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting po-
sitions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an acci-
dent. Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could
lead to severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the dan-
ger of being thrown from the vehicle.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the
ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle
and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also de-
signed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together,
all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the
risk of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially
reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a seri-
ous accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection
provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fas-
tened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in
which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle
occupants have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety instructions on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in an accident.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are
not damaged.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
24 Seat belts
WARNING
● If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe
injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be ach-
ieved only if you use them properly.
● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town.
The other vehicle occupants must also wear the seat belts at all times,
otherwise they run the risk of being injured.
● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not
positioned correctly.
● Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat
belt.
● Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as
the vehicle is in motion.
● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal
injury.
● The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.
● The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as
glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any
sharp edges.
● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi-
tion.
● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the
proper fit and function of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to pro-
tect.
● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or
other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar instruments to al-
ter the position of the belt webbing.
WARNING (Continued)
● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retrac-
tors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an
accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at reg-
ular intervals.
● Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must
be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even
if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be
checked.
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work
properly ⇒ page 225.
25Seat belts
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked in-
to position by a latch.
Fig. 12 Belt buckle and
latch plate of seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not
positioned correctly.
– Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
– To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ Fig. 12.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged
in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is
pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep areas
or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder
belt is locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt ten-
sioners ⇒ page 29.
WARNING
● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
● The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this,
the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is in-
creased.
● If a vehicle occupant is incorrectly belted in, the seat belt cannot pro-
tect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause ex-
tremely severe injuries.
● Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat
in group 0, 0+ or 1 ⇒ page 46.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
26 Seat belts
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they
are properly positioned.
Fig. 13 Correct seat belt
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from front
Fig. 14 Correct seat belt
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from side
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
● belt height adjustment for the front seats.
● front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoul-
der, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the
torso ⇒ Fig. 13.
● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across
the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis
⇒ Fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
● Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 23.
27Seat belts
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to
wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnan-
cy.
Fig. 15 Positioning seat
belts during pregnancy
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt
is properly positioned ⇒ page 26.
– Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly ⇒ page 10.
– Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest
and as low as possible over the pelvis ⇒ Fig. 15.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒
.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged
in the buckle.
WARNING
● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as
possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so
that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
● Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 23.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Fig. 16 Remove latch
plate from buckle
– Press the red button on the belt buckle
⇒
Fig. 16. The latch
plate is released and springs out
⇒
.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
28 Seat belts
– Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the
trim is not damaged.
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Adjusting the seat belt height
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the position
of the seat belt at the shoulder.
Fig. 17 Location of the
belt height adjuster
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can be used to adjust the
proper belt position at the shoulder.
– Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in
this position
⇒
Fig. 17.
– Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjus-
ted the seat belt ⇒ page 26.
– After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal
injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs sub-
stantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe or
fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially in-
creased when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who
has assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are re-
sponsible for yourself and all passengers, especially children.
Therefore:
– Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the
vehicle is moving ⇒
.
WARNING
● An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
● Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts
properly and to wear them for the whole journey.
● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of seat belts ⇒ page 23.
29Seat belts
Seat belt tensioners
Function of the seat belt tensioner
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats
are retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front seats are equipped with belt
tensioners. Sensors will trigger the belt tensioners during severe head-on,
lateral and rear collisions only if the seat belt is being worn. This retracts
and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occupants.
The seat belt tensioner can be triggered only once.
The seat belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns or in situations where no large
forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note
● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
● The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are famili-
ar with these regulations, which are also available to you.
Service and disposal of belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in
the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and
install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt
may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
● Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics in-
crease the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to
trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt ten-
sioners or seat belts.
● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be
repaired.
● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal
and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must
be performed by a specialised workshop only.
● The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and
must be changed if they have been activated.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
30 Airbag system
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting
position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sit-
ting position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please en-
sure the following before driving:
– Always wear the seat belt properly ⇒ page 19.
– Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly
⇒ page 10.
– Adjust the front passenger seat correctly ⇒ page 11.
– Adjust the head restraint correctly ⇒ page 13.
– Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle ⇒ page 46.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants as-
sume a correct sitting position while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat
belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,
the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This
also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the
front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig-
gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
dent, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the
vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the
control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side
and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible
damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a
determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting po-
sition can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
● All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted
can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up
to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never transport
children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is
not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
● If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side
while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a sub-
stantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-
ther increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
31Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the
seat belt properly ⇒ page 19.
● Always adjust the front seats properly.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front pas-
senger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
The front passenger front airbag is a serious risk for a child if it is activated.
The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if he/she is transpor-
ted in a rear-facing child seat. Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such force that it can cause critical or fatal injuries.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear
seats. That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the
front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch
⇒ page 44. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the
age and size of each child ⇒ page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the air-
bag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
WARNING
● If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the
child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident in-
creases.
● Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the
front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal in-
juries if the front passenger airbag is triggered.
● An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child
seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the back-
rest.
● If, under special circumstances, it is necessary to transport a child in
a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely es-
sential that you observe the following safety measures:
– Deactivate the front passenger airbag ⇒ page 44, Deactivating
airbags*.
– Child seats must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for
use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
– Follow the installation instructions given by the child seat manu-
facturer and observe the safety instructions ⇒ page 46, Child safe-
ty.
– Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger
seat completely backwards so that the greatest possible distance to
the front passenger airbag is ensured.
– Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being
pushed completely back.
– The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright po-
sition.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
32 Airbag system
Control lamp for airbag and seat belt tensioner
This control lamp monitors the airbag and seat belt tension-
er system.
The control lamp monitors all airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehi-
cle, including control units and wiring connections.
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly moni-
tored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the control lamp
lights for several seconds and the instrument panel display* shows AIR-
BAG/TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the control lamp :
● does not light up when the ignition is switched on
● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on
● turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on
● lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the in-
strument panel display for approx. 10 seconds and a short audible warning
is given. In this event, you should have a specialised workshop check the
system immediately.
If any of the airbags are disabled by a Technical Service, the warning lamp
lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off if there
is no fault.
WARNING
● If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot
properly perform its protective function.
● If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag
system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered
correctly.
Repairs, maintenance and disposal of airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehi-
cle. If work is carried out on the airbag system or parts have to be removed
and fitted on the system when performing other repair work, parts of the air-
bag system may be damaged. In the event of an accident this could cause
the airbag to inflate incorrectly or not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the airbag are scrapped. Specialised workshops and vehicle
disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
● If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are
used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The air-
bags may fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
● Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the sur-
face of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dash panel, and do
not obstruct or modify them in any way.
● It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele-
phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
33Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
● To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a
water-moistened cloth. Never clean the dash panel and the airbag mod-
ule surface with cleaners containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface
to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become de-
tached and cause injuries.
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
system.
● Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the air-
bag components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel)
should be performed only by a specialised workshop. Specialised work-
shops have the necessary tools, repair information and qualified person-
nel.
● We strongly recommend you to go to a specialised workshop for all
work on the airbag system.
● Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
For the sake of the environment
The airbags, which are a special type of waste, must be disposed of through
an authorised service, because they contain pyrotechnic elements.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
34 Airbag system
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fig. 18 Driver airbag lo-
cated in steering wheel
Fig. 19 Front passenger
airbag located in dash
panel
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ⇒ Fig. 18 and
the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ⇒ Fig. 19. Air-
bags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front
occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a se-
vere frontal collision ⇒ page 37, Safety notes on the front airbag system.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat
belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the air-
bags can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints
properly. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety ⇒ page 19, Brief introduction.
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
● an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
● the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger
● a control lamp on the dash panel ⇒ page 32
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control
lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control lamp :
● does not light up when the ignition is switched on ⇒ page 32
● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on
● turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on
● lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving
35Airbag system
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
● the ignition is switched off
● there is a minor frontal collision
● there is a side collision
● there is a rear-end collision
● the vehicle turns over
WARNING
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if
the occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, Proper sitting position for
occupants.
● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal colli-
sion the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of front airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of injuries to the head or
chest.
Fig. 20 Inflated front air-
bags
The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front
passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and de-
ploy in front of the driver and front passenger
⇒
Fig. 20. The fully deployed
airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to
reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
36 Airbag system
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
Fig. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags
are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the
driver and front passenger airbags are triggered ⇒ Fig. 21. The airbag cov-
ers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
37Airbag system
Safety notes on the front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
● It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and dash panel. If the minimum
distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the ve-
hicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and
head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the
occupant.
● If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side
while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a sub-
stantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-
ther increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
● Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate re-
straint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sus-
tain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates ⇒ page 46,
Child safety.
● The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags
must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
● It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or
telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
● Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fig. 22 Side airbag in
driver seat
The front side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger
seat backrests
⇒
Fig. 22. The rear side airbags are located in the rear wheel
housing lining. The locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the up-
per region of the backrests and in the rear wheel housing lining.
Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat oc-
cupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision
⇒
page 39, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers
on the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to
their normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat
belts also hold the passengers in the front seats and the outer rear seats in
a position where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
38 Airbag system
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing
their seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also
for your safety ⇒ page 19, Brief introduction.
The side airbag system will not be triggered if:
● the ignition is switched off
● there is a minor side collision
● there is a frontal collision
● there is a rear-end collision
● the vehicle turns over
The main parts of the airbag system are:
● an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
● The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear
side airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing
● a control lamp on the dash panel ⇒ page 32
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control
lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched
on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
● In a side collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do
not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors,
due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door
panel.
● Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
● Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the
panels have not been correctly fitted.
WARNING (Continued)
● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have
been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been cor-
rectly closed.
● Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers
or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
● Any work carried out to the doors should be made in an authorised
specialised workshop.
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if
the occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, Proper sitting position for
occupants.
● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a side colli-
sion, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
39Airbag system
Operation of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury
in many side impact collisions.
Fig. 23 Inflated side air-
bag on left side of vehicle
In some side collisions, the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of
the vehicle
⇒
Fig. 23.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to
the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury
if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
● In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
● Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in
the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children
or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to
attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would im-
pair the protection offered by the side airbags.
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing.
Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon
the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case,
the side airbags would not be triggered.
● Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats
with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your
vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
40 Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, serious-
ly reducing the airbag's effectiveness ⇒ page 226, Accessories, replace-
ment of parts and modifications.
● Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of
the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised
workshop.
● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
● When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose
themselves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This
is particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger
seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have
critical consequences including serious injury or death ⇒ page 46,
Child safety.
● Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat)
should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults
may occur during the airbag system operation.
WARNING (Continued)
● Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
● The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in
the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side
and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modi-
fied in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged,
the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the
front door must be done in a specialised workshop.
41Airbag system
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fig. 24 Location of head airbags on the left side of the
vehicle
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
⇒ Fig. 24 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the vehi-
cle occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the
event of a severe side collision ⇒ page 42, Safety notes on the operation
of the curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints
properly. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety ⇒ page 19, Brief introduction.
The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:
● an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
● the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front pas-
senger and passengers on the rear seats
● a control lamp on the dash panel ⇒ page 32
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically.
The curtain airbag system will not be triggered if:
● the ignition is switched off
● there is a frontal collision
● there is a rear-end collision
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
42 Airbag system
● the vehicle turns over
● there is a minor side collision
WARNING
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked im-
mediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that
during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury
in a side collision.
Fig. 25 Deployed curtain
airbags
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact
side of the vehicle ⇒ Fig. 25.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
process, the curtain airbag covers the side windows and door pillars.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants
and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
● In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disabled in those vehi-
cles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See a Techni-
cal Service to make this adjustment.
● There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the oc-
cupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain air-
bags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and pro-
vide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have
43Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached
to the side windows ⇒ page 226, Accessories, replacement of parts and
modifications.
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing.
Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do
not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
● Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of
the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lin-
ing) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,
faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
● Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
● The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in
the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side
and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modi-
fied in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged,
the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the
front door must be done in a specialised workshop.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
44 Airbag system
Deactivating airbags*
Front passenger front airbag deactivation
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger front airbag must be de-activated.
Fig. 26 In the glove com-
partment: switch for acti-
vating and deactivating
the front passenger air-
bag
Fig. 27 Control lamp for
deactivated front passen-
ger airbag in centre con-
sole
When the front passenger airbag is deactivated, only the front air-
bag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain acti-
vated.
Disabling the front passenger front airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
– Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the
front passenger airbag ⇒ Fig. 26. About 3/4 of the key should
enter, as far as it will go.
– Then turn the key gently to the OFF position. Do not force it if
you feel resistance, and make sure you have inserted the key
fully.
– Check that the control lamp, “OFF”, on the instrument panel
⇒ Fig. 27 remains lit when the ignition is switched on ⇒
.
Activating the front passenger front airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
45Airbag system
– Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the
front passenger airbag ⇒ Fig. 26. About 3/4 of the key should
enter, as far as it will go.
– Then turn the key gently to the ON position. Do not force it if you
feel resistance, and make sure you have inserted the key fully.
– Check that the control lamp on the instrument panel ⇒ Fig. 27
does not light up when the ignition is switched on ⇒
.
WARNING
● The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated
switch.
● You should only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when, in
exceptional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat ⇒ page 46, Child safety.
● Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Other-
wise, there is a risk of death.
● As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger
seat, enable the front passenger front airbag again.
● Only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when the ignition is
off, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause
the airbag to not deploy properly or not deploy at all.
● Never leave the key in the airbag deactivation switch as it could get
damaged or activate or deactivate the airbag during driving.
WARNING (Continued)
● When the front passenger front airbag is deactivated, if the control
lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up, there may be a fault in the
airbag system:
– Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised
workshop.
– Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front pas-
senger front airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a
fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or
fatal injuries.
– It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy
in the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.
● When using the ignition key to activate/deactivate the front passen-
ger front airbag, only the front passenger airbag will be activated/deacti-
vated. The side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain
active.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
46 Child safety
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel
on the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children trav-
elling on the rear seat must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the centre of the rear seat or be-
hind the front passenger seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children ⇒ page 21, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children
are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Original Ac-
cessories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke
1)
.
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying
with the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note
⇒ page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of in-
jury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
– Protect your children by properly using the appropriate child
seats ⇒ page 48.
– Always ensure that the seat belt is properly positioned accord-
ing to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child
seat.
– When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traf-
fic.
– Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least ev-
ery two hours.
1)
Not for all countries
47Child safety
WARNING
● Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of
potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep-
tional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front
passenger front airbag must always be disabled ⇒ page 44, Deactivating
airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it
to the highest position.
● For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate
the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
● All vehicle occupants, especially children, must assume the proper
sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
● Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potential-
ly fatal injuries to the child!
● Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being prop-
erly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an acci-
dent, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehicle occupants.
● If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is
moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly impor-
tant if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag
system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or
even death.
● A suitable child seat can protect your child!
● Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehi-
cle.
● Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or
cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
WARNING (Continued)
● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal
seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdomi-
nal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
● Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on
any sharp edges.
● Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor colli-
sion or in sudden braking manoeuvres.
● The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt is
properly positioned ⇒ page 25, Seat belts.
● Only one child may occupy a child seat ⇒ page 48, Child seats.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
48 Child safety
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 stand-
ard bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test num-
ber below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 28 A group 0 rear-
facing child seat fitted on
the rear seat
Group 0: For babies up to about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight, the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration
⇒
Fig. 28.
Group 0+: For babies up to about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the
most suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒
in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
49Child safety
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 29 A category 1 for-
ward-facing child seat fit-
ted on the rear seat
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the
rear of the vehicle are most appropriate for babies and small children
weighing between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒
in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 30 Forward-facing
child seat installed on
rear seat
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best pro-
tected by group 2 child seats together with properly adjusted seat belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than
1.5 metres tall are best protected by child seats with head restraints togeth-
er with properly worn seat belts
⇒
Fig. 30.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
50 Child safety
WARNING
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the cen-
tre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must
lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across
the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt
tight if necessary to take up any slack ⇒ page 25, Seat belts.
● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of child seats ⇒
in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
51Child safety
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and
on the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
● Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
● Child seats in groups 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* sys-
tems can be secured without using the seatbelt, thanks to the ISOFIX and
Top Tether* ⇒ page 52 securing rings.
Mass group
Seating position
Front passenger
seat
Rear side seat Rear central
seat
Group 0
to 10 kg
U* U U
Group 0+
to 13 kg
U* U U
Group I
9 to 18 kg
U* U U
Group II
15 to 25 kg
U* U U
Group III
22 to 36 kg
U* U U
Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this mass group.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as pos-
sible and always disable the airbag.
WARNING
● When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a re-
straint system suitable for age, weight and size.
● Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could
cause fatal injuries to the child! However, if, in exceptional cases, it is
necessary to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front pas-
senger airbag ⇒ page 44, Deactivating airbags* must always be disabled
and the seat adjusted to its highest position, where possible.
● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of child seats ⇒
in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
U:
*:
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
52 Child safety
Child seats fastened with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
Child seats with the ISOFIX or Top Tether* system can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats.
Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing
rings
Fig. 32 Top Tether* se-
curing ring
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow
the manufacturer's instructions.
– Move the rear seat as far to the rear as it will go.
– Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the
child seat can be heard to engage securely. If the child seat is
equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to the corre-
spondent ring ⇒ Fig. 32. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the
rear floor. The access to the ISOFIX rings is between the rear seat backrest
and the seat cushioning. The Top Tether* anchors are located at the rear of
the backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat backrest or in the luggage
compartment).
Child seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* attachment system are available
from Technical Services.
53Child safety
Mass group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction
Vehicle Isofix positions
Rear side seats
Baby carrier
F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X
G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU
B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU
A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Suitable for ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in
this mass group
ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this
mass group or size class
WARNING
● The securing rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Top
Tether* child seats.
● Never secure child seats that do not have the ISOFIX and Top Tether*
system, retaining belts or other objects to the securing rings – this could
result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!
● Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the “ISOFIX” and
Top Tether* securing rings.
IU:
X:
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
54 Cockpit
Fig. 33 Dash panel
55Cockpit
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the dash panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Light intensity regulator for the instruments and controls . . . . 119
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Air vents
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* 122, 193
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Instrument panel:
– Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
– Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
– Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ Driver front airbag . . 30
Windscreen wiper and washer lever and operation of the
multifunction display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 63
Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Controls for
– Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
– Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
– Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Radio/Navigator*
Right seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . 44
Front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Glove compartment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cup holder compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Controls on the centre console:
– Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
– ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
– Tyre pressure control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
– Park Pilot* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
– Cigarette lighter/Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
– Exterior mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
– Start-Stop* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Hazard warning light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Steering column control lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
56 Cockpit
Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . . . 110
Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . 110
Note
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain model
versions or are optional extras.
26
27
28
29
57Cockpit
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Fig. 34 Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument
panel
Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument panel
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 58
Multifunction display ⇒ page 61
Engine coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 58
Rev counter ⇒ page 59
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button ⇒ page 59
Speedometer ⇒ page 59
1
2
3
4
5
6
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
58 Cockpit
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Fig. 35 Instrument pan-
el: fuel gauge
Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve area ⇒ Fig. 35 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light up and an audible warning will sound reminding the driver to
refuel. At this point there are still 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears in the dash panel display
1)
:
PLEASE REFUEL [XXX]
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
Fig. 36 Instrument pan-
el: engine coolant tem-
perature gauge
Needle in cold zone
A
Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads ⇒ Fig. 36.
Needle in normal zone
B
In normal driving conditions, the needle should be in the middle section of
the scale. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard,
especially at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as
long as the warning lamp does not light up and no warning message* ap-
pears on the instrument panel display.
Needle in warning zone
C
The warning lamp* ⇒ Fig. 48
2
will light up if the needle is in the warning
zone. The following warning message appears on the instrument panel dis-
play
1)
. Stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level
⇒ page 242 ⇒
.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
59Cockpit
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should ob-
tain technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 235.
CAUTION
Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant.
At high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone
⇒
Fig. 34
4
indicates the maximum engine speed
operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to change up into
a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot off the accelerator
before the needle reaches the red zone.
CAUTION
To prevent possible engine malfunctions, the rev counter needle should not
reach the red zone. The start of the red zone on the dial is different for some
engine versions.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up into higher gears sooner, following the recommended gear in-
dications ⇒ Fig. 40 will help you to reduce fuel consumption, emissions and
also engine noise.
Speedometer
The speedometer is equipped with a digital odometer and a trip recorder, in
addition to a service intervals display.
During the running-in period, the instructions shown on ⇒ page 204
should be followed.
Setting the digital clock*
The digital clock is located in the instrument panel display.
– Turn the setting knob ⇒ Fig. 34
5
clockwise until the first
“click” to set the hour. The hour will flash. To change the hour,
press the button.
– Turn the setting knob clockwise to the second “click” to set the
minutes. The minutes will flash. To change the minutes, press
the button.
Note
On Highline versions, the time can also be configured on the Kombi menu.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
60 Cockpit
LPG system*
Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL
LPG gauge
Fig. 37 Instrument pan-
el: gas gauge.
LPG system filler level display
The LPG tank ⇒
in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres at an
outside temperature of +15 °C (+59 °F)⇒ page 230, Refuelling with LPG.
The charge level can be checked on the analogue gas gauge located on the
instrument panel ⇒ Fig. 37. When the level reaches reserve, a notification
text is displayed on the screen. Refill with LPG at the earliest opportunity.
If while driving with LPG a sudden acoustic signal is heard, the on-screen
message is shown
1)
:
LPG fault, consult Workshop
It means there is a fault in the LPG system. Take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop to check the LPG system.
Problem: If the vehicle is left parked for a long time immediately after refuel-
ling, the natural gas level indicator may not accurately indicate the same
level shown after refuelling when the vehicle is started up again. This is not
due to a leak in the system.
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause se-
vere burns and other injury.
● Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
● When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechani-
cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
● The values shown in the average fuel consumption and distance to emp-
ty indications on the multifunction display (MFI)
2)
on the instrument panel
display
1)
are approximate values only.
● Two different consumption values are given on the MFI, depending on
whether the vehicle is running in GAS or Petrol mode.
● Please check the fuel level on the fuel level gauge on the instrument
panel ⇒ page 58.
● If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside tem-
perature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on
LPG. Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
1)
Depending on the model version
2)
Optional equipment
61Cockpit
Digital instrument panel display
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other
things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector
lever position.
Fig. 38 Detailed view of
the instrument panel:
screen with different in-
dicators
Digital clock display
⇒
page 59. On the right of the display: Selector
lever position display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position
of the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for tiptronic)* is
highlighted.
Outside temperature.
Odometer or flexible service interval display*.
1
2
3
Displayed categories*
The display on the instrument panel shows the mileage and
trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Fig. 39 Digital instru-
ment panel display
Clock: “Setting the time”. On the right of the display: Selector lever po-
sition display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of the
selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) is highligh-
ted.
There are optional and automatic displays in this field.
Optional indicators: e.g. those on the multifunction display (MFI)
Automatic indicators: Information and warning messages.
Menus providing further information and which can be used to make di-
verse settings are also shown: “Instrument panel menus”
Outside temperature.
Odometer or flexible service interval display.
1
2
–
–
–
3
4
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
62 Cockpit
Recommended gear display*
This display helps to save fuel.
Fig. 40 Gear display
Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot
will be shown next to the gear display. If you are not in the correct gear, an
arrow will appear next to the gear display indicating whether you should
change up or down.
Note
The gear change indication should not be taken into account the accelera-
tion is required (for example when overtaking).
Odometer or flexible service interval display
Odometer
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates
steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by holding
down the reset button for a few seconds.
Service interval display
Vehicles with Service intervals dependent on time/distance travelled al-
ready have certain service intervals set. The intervals are calculated individ-
ually in vehicles with LongLife service.
The service interval display only indicates the dates of services that include
engine oil change. The dates of all other services, such as Inspection Serv-
ice or brake fluid change, appear in the sticker on the door pillar or in the
Maintenance Programme.
A Service pre-warning will appear in the odometer if a service is due soon. A
“spanner” symbol appears and the display “km” with the distance that can
be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will change
after approximately 10 seconds. A “clock symbol” appears and the number
of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The following
message is shown in the instrument panel display*:
Service in
[XXXX]
km
or
[XXXX]
days
The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after the ig-
nition is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can be
resumed by briefly pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by press-
ing the
OK
button on the steering wheel controls.
With the ignition on, you can check the current service message at any mo-
ment in the Vehicle status menu or turning the reset button to access the
service display.
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or
day information.
63Cockpit
Indications for vehicles with LongLife service
Technical progress has made it possible to considerably reduce servicing re-
quirements. With the LongLife System, SEAT ensures that your vehicle only
has an interval service when it is necessary. The length of the Interval Serv-
ices (max. two years) is determined by factors such as conditions under
which the vehicle is used and personal driving style.
The service pre-warning will first appear 20 days before the date on which
the service is due. The distance travelled is rounded off to the nearest
100 km (miles) and the time to full days. The current service message can
only be consulted 500 km (300 miles) after the last service. Until that time,
only dashes are displayed.
Note
● If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indica-
ted after 15 000 km (10 000 miles) or one year and will not be calculated
individually.
● Do not reset the display between service intervals as the display will
otherwise be incorrect.
● In LongLife Service vehicles, if the battery is disconnected for a long pe-
riod, the days remaining until the next service cannot be calculated. There-
fore, the service message displays on the instrument panel may be incor-
rect. Take into account the maximum authorised service intervals.
Multifunction display (MFI)*
The multifunction display (MFI) shows you information on
the journey and fuel consumption.
Fig. 41 Rocker buttons A
and B. Steering wheel
controls.
Fig. 42 Digital instru-
ment panel display
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
64 Cockpit
The multifunction system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Trip
memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown
in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting a memory
– When the ignition is on, briefly press button ⇒ Fig. 41
A
on the
windscreen wiper lever to change from one memory to another
or press button
A
on the steering wheel controls ⇒ Fig. 41.
Resetting a memory
– Select the memory that you would like to reset.
– Hold down button
A
on the windscreen wiper lever or button
A
on the steering wheel controls for at least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the mo-
ment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is con-
tinued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will be
added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-
neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km (miles) distance
travelled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named val-
ues is reached.
Information in the multifunction display (MFI)*
Fig. 43 Rocker buttons A
and B. Steering wheel
controls.
Fig. 44 Digital instru-
ment panel display: aver-
age fuel consumption in-
dicator.
You can switch between the following displays in the multifunction display
(MFI) by operating rocker switch ⇒ Fig. 43
B
on the window wiper lever.
65Cockpit
Memory displays
● Distance
● Average speed
● Driving speed
● Speed warning at --- km/h (mph)
● Journey duration
● Current fuel consumption
● Average fuel consumption
● Operating range
km (miles) - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km (miles). The
memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
km/h (mph) - Average speed
The average speed will be shown after running a distance of approximately
100 metres. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The display will be
updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
km/h (mph) - Driving speed
Driving speed is digitally shown in the display.
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required speed, enter the speed indicator mode and
press the button
A
(Reset), the display remembers the indicated speed. If
the indicated speed is exceeded, a warning message is displayed on the
screen
1)
and an acoustic signal is given.
This may be deactivated by pressing the button
A
(Reset).
The speed may be altered using the rocker switch
B
in steps of 5 km/h
(mph) within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been
reached.
l/100 km or l/h - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the ve-
hicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion ⇒ page 206.
litre/100 km - Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown ⇒ Fig. 44 after a distance of
approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Until then dashes will appear
in the display. The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle
is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
Km (miles) - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current
fuel consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same
conditions as a reference.
Outside temperature indicator
The measurement margin ranges from -45 °C (-49 °F) to +58 °C (+136.4 °F).
At temperatures lower than +4 °C (+39.2 °F), an “ice crystal symbol” is also
displayed and a “warning” is given if the vehicle is moving at more than
1)
Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be repre-
sented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
66 Cockpit
20 km/h (12 mph) (ice warning). This symbol will flash for about 10 sec-
onds and remains lit as long as the outside temperature does not rise
above +4 °C (+39.2 °F) or +6 °C (+42.8 °F) if it was already lit.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake sym-
bol” is not shown. For this reason you should not rely exclusively on this
display - Risk of accident!
Note
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature
as a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Warning or information message in the display
Faults are shown in the display with control lamps and
warning/information reports.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the ig-
nition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are
indicated by symbols with warning or information messages in the display.
An audible warning is given in certain cases.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols (pri-
ority 2).
Information text
In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive informa-
tion in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Note
In the case of screens without warning or information messages, faults are
indicated exclusively by the control lamps.
Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain
professional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will contin-
ue until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warn-
ing message.
Examples of priority 1 warning messages (red)
● Brake system symbol with the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID
INSTRUCTION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
● Coolant symbol with the warning message STOP SEE COOLANT IN-
STRUCTION MANUAL.
● Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning message STOP ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompa-
nied by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as
possible.
67Cockpit
If several priority 2 warning messages are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. Af-
ter a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be
shown as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
messages have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning messages (yellow):
1)
● Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
● Windscreen washer fluid level symbol with the information message
ADD WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank
⇒ page 244.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
68 Cockpit
Instrument panel menus*
Example of menu use
All the menus on the instrument panel may be used accord-
ing to the following procedure. The instrument panel menus
may vary according to the version of the model.
Fig. 45 Windscreen wip-
er lever: button A to con-
firm the menu selection
and rocker switch B to
change the menu
Fig. 46 Steering wheel
controls: button A to con-
firm the menu selection
and switch B to change
the menu
The setting of a speed warning will be used as an example of how
to use the menus. This is a good idea if you are, for example, using
winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
1. Open the main menu with the MFI lever
– Switch the ignition on.
– Hold down button
B
for two seconds to return to main menu
from other menu. It may be necessary to repeat this operation
until the main menu is displayed.
2. Open the menu “Configuration” with the MFI lever
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower
end of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed be-
tween two lines and there will also be a triangle on the right.
– Select menu Configuration.
– Press button
A
on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura-
tion
menu is opened.
69Cockpit
2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls
– To access the “Configuration” menu, press button
C
⇒ Fig. 46
until the menu is displayed. Now you are in this menu.
3. Open the main menu “Winter tyres”
– Select option Winter tyres using switch
B
.
– Press the button
A
. The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
– Use button
B
to select the option +10 km/h or -10 km/h and
press button
B
to either increase or decrease the speed dis-
played.
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
– Use switch
B
to select the menu point On / Off and press the
button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed warn-
ing is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---.
6. To close the menu “Winter tyres”
– In the menu select Back.
The function “Winter tyres” sends an optical and an acoustic signal when
the vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu “Winter tyres”
In the menu
Winter tyres
Function
Name of menu displayed
X km/h The current set speed is displayed
or --- or dashes will be shown if the function is deactivated.
On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated
+10 km/h (140
mph)
The set value increases by 10 km/h (mph)
-10 km/h (140
mph)
The set value decreases by 10 km/h (mph)
Back The menu “Winter tyres” is closed and the last dis-
played menu is shown.
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Main menu
The menu provides access to the different display functions
(only with the MFI lever).
Fig. 47 Windscreen wip-
er lever (MFI): button A to
confirm the menu selec-
tion and rocker switch B
to change the menu
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
70 Cockpit
Open main menu
– Switch the ignition on.
– Press and hold the eject button
B
for at least two seconds. It
may be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu
is displayed.
Select a menu from the main menu
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower
end of rocker switch
B
. The selected option is displayed be-
tween two horizontal lines.
– Press button
A
to select the entry.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68
Main menu effect
Multifunction dis-
play
Change to the multifunction display (MFI): “Multifunc-
tion display (MFI)”
Audio This menu displays the available information for the
active audio source (radio station, CD audio track /
MP3 / USB / iPod / Bluetooth audio
a)
/ call informa-
tion
a)
.
Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a
navigation system. The navigation system must be
switched on. When the route guidance is activated, the
turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed. The
appearance is similar to the Navigation system.
If the route guidance is not activated, the direction of
travel (compass) and the name of the street along
which you are driving are shown.
Telephone This menu is only available in vehicles with radio unit if
the vehicle is fitted with the telephone function. In ve-
hicles fitted with a radio navigation system, this menu
is available in the central unit (navigator) ⇒ Book-
let Navigation system..
Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information
texts: “Vehicle status menu”
This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-
played.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when
using winter tyres, units, language, independent heat-
ing, the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience
menu to be reset.
a)
Only in vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system.
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Multifunction display menu (MFI)
The multifunction display (MFI) shows you information on
the journey and fuel consumption.
The multifunction display (MFI) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip memo-
ry and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory is shown on the upper right
hand section of the display at all times.
Open the multifunction display menu
Select the Multifunction display menu from the main menu ⇒ page 69
and press the
OK
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multi-
function steering wheel*.
–
71Cockpit
Selecting a memory
To change from one memory to another, briefly press button
A
⇒ Fig. 45 ⇒ page 68 on the windscreen wiper lever or the
OK
button on
the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ Fig. 46 ⇒ page 68 while the ignition
is switched on.
Resetting a memory
Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.
Hold down button
A
on the windscreen wiper lever or the
OK
button
on the multifunction steering wheel* for at least two seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the mo-
ment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is con-
tinued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will be
added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of individual
journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to
a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km (miles) distance
travelled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named val-
ues is reached.
Memory indications
The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the
rocker switch
B
⇒ Fig. 45 ⇒ page 68 on the windscreen wiper lever or by
pressing button
or
⇒ Fig. 46 on the multifunction steering wheel*.
Personal selection of display
The driver can establish which displays are shown on the instrument panel
display as required:
● Select the submenu Multifunction Display Data from the Configuration
menu ⇒ page 73.
● The displays can be activated or deactivated individually by marking the
required option and pressing the
OK
button on the windscreen wiper lever
or the multifunction steering wheel*.
–
–
–
Duration in h and min
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been
reached.
Current fuel consumption in l/100 km or l/hour
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litres/100 km whilst
the vehicle is in motion or in litres/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary
position with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion ⇒ page 171.
Average fuel consumption in l/100 km
The average fuel consumption will be shown after a distance of approxi-
mately 100 metres has been travelled. Until then dashes will appear in the
display. The display will be updated every five seconds while the vehicle is
in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
Distance travelled in km (miles)
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km (miles). The
memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Average speed in km/h (mph)
After starting the ignition, the average speed will be shown after a distance
of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Until then dashes will ap-
pear in the display. The display will be updated every five seconds while the
vehicle is in motion.
Speed warning at --- km/h (mph)
This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the
OK
button on the windscreen wiper lever
A
or the multifunction steering
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
72 Cockpit
wheel* to select the current speed. The instrument panel display gives the
selected speed, for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five sec-
onds to reset the speed between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (155
mph) using rocker switch
B
or buttons
or
on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel*. Press the
OK
button or wait five seconds until the speed is stor-
ed and the warning is activated. If the set speed is exceeded, an audible
warning is heard and a warning message is displayed until the speed is re-
duced to at least 4 km/h (2 mph) below the stored speed. The function is
switched off by pressing the
OK
button again. Speed warning --- km/h
(miles) is now displayed on the instrument panel.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake sym-
bol” is not shown. For this reason you should not rely exclusively on this
display - Risk of accident!
Note
● There are different instrument panels; therefore the multifunction dis-
play may vary.
● When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tem-
perature displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside tempera-
ture as a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
● Vehicles with a multifunction steering wheel* do not have buttons on
the windscreen wiper lever. The multifunction display can only be controlled
from the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel*.
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warning or information texts
Open Vehicle Condition menu
– Select the option Vehicle status from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button
OK
on the windscreen wiper lever
A
⇒ Fig. 47. or
– Press button
or
on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ Fig. 46 until the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.
Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: “Information and warn-
ing messages on the screen” will automatically disappear from the screen
after a time and will be stored in the Vehicle status menu.
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is
no warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not dis-
played. If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68.
Note
If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.
73Cockpit
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-
tions.
Open Configuration menu
– Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button
OK
A
⇒ Fig. 45 on the windscreen
wiper lever. or
– Press button
or
on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ Fig. 46 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68.
Displayed on the
screen
effect
Multifunction display
data.
This menu is used to establish the data in the mul-
tifunction display menu to be displayed on the in-
strument panel ⇒ page 70
Convenience This menu allows you to make the settings for the
convenience functions in the vehicle.
Lights and visibility From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle
lighting settings.
Time The hours and minutes of the clock and the naviga-
tion system can be changed. Choose between 12
and 24-hour format and change to summer time.
Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of a speed at which an
optical and acoustic warning will be given by the
system. You can use this function, for example, if
you have fitted winter tyres which are not suited for
the top speed of your vehicle. Please see the sec-
tion “Wheels and tyres”.
Language The display texts and the navigation system texts
can be seen in different languages.
Units This option allows you to select the units for dis-
playing temperature, fuel consumption values and
distances.
sel. speed The instrument panel also displays the speed in
another different unit of measurement (mph or km/
h) to that given on the speedometer.
Inter Service Consult service messages and reset service interval
display here.
Factory settings The manufacturer's predefined values for the func-
tions of this menu are restored.
Back
a)
This returns to the main menu.
a)
Only if the windscreen wiper lever is used (MFI).
Note
● For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
● SEAT dealerships are able to programme other functions or change the
existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.
● The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
Convenience menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-
ience settings.
Open menu Convenience
– Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press
the button
OK
A
⇒ Fig. 45 on the windscreen wiper lever.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
74 Cockpit
– Press button
or
on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ Fig. 46 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
– Choose the option Convenience from the main menu and press
the button
A
on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68
Displayed on the
screen
effect
Central locking. One door: individual unlocking activated.
Auto lock: The doors are automatically locked when
the vehicle is travelling at more than approx
15 km/h (10 mph).
Auto unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key
is removed from the ignition.
Elec. window control Opening and closing electric windows: this deter-
mines whether to open or close all the windows
when the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open
function can also be activated for the driver door
only.
Exterior mirror ad-
just.
If synchronised adjustment is selected, when the
driver side exterior mirror is adjusted, the passen-
ger exterior mirror is also moved.
Factory settings The predefined factory values for the functions of
this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting
settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
– Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button
OK
A
⇒ page 68 on the windscreen
wiper lever. or
– Press button
or
on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ Fig. 46 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
– Select the option Lights & visibil. from the menu and press but-
ton
A
on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68.
Displayed on the
screen
effect
Coming Home/
Leaving Home
This option permits the adjustment of the time dur-
ing which the headlights remain lit after the vehicle
is locked, and also permits the function to be
switched on and off
Indicator conf. The convenience turn signal function can be activa-
ted or deactivated here. With the convenience
mode activated, the turn signal will blink at least
three times when turned on.
Factory settings The predefined factory values for the functions of
this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
75Cockpit
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
76 Cockpit
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The control lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig. 48 Instrument panel warning and control lamps.
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted
only on certain model versions or are optional extras.
77Cockpit
Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning lamps
Further infor-
mation
1
Fuel level / reserve ⇒ page 80
2
Coolant level / coolant temperature ⇒ page 81
3
Rear fog light switched on ⇒ page 82
4
Turn signals in operation ⇒ page 82
5
Engine fault (petrol engine) ⇒ page 82
Glow plug system (diesel engines) ⇒ page 82
6
Main beam switched on ⇒ page 82
7
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine
particulate filter
⇒ page 82
8
ABS system fault ⇒ page 83
9
Windscreen washer fluid level ⇒ page 83
10
Alternator fault ⇒ page 84
11
Fasten seat belts! ⇒ page 19
12
Brake pad worn ⇒ page 84
13
Tyre pressure ⇒ page 84
Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning lamps
Further infor-
mation
14
Airbag or belt tensioner system fault or
airbag disabled
⇒ page 29
⇒ page 32
15
Bulb defective ⇒ page 86
16
Brake fluid required or
brake system fault
⇒ page 85
17
Red:
Engine oil pressure
⇒ page 86
Yellow:
If flashing: engine oil sensor faulty
If it remains lit: insufficient engine oil
18
Handbrake on ⇒ page 188
19
Cruise speed activated (Cruise control) ⇒ page 87
20
Door open indicator ⇒ page 87
21
If it stays lit: ASR switched off
⇒ page 88
⇒ page 88
⇒ page 172
22
Electromechanical steering ⇒ page 87
23
Fault in the emission control system ⇒ page 87
24
If flashing: the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is working or the ASR is work-
ing
If the following remain lit: ESC or ASR
faulty
⇒ page 88
⇒ page 88
⇒ page 172
25
Selector lever lock (automatic gearbox) ⇒ page 89
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
78 Cockpit
WARNING
● Failure to observe control lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
● The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to pre-
vent danger to third parties.
● The engine compartment is a dangerous area. Before you open the
bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must
switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or
other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings ⇒ page 235.
Note
● The appropriate control lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information messages in the display.
● In vehicles with warning or information messages on the screen, the ap-
propriate control lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information
message will also appear on the screen.
Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL
Overview of control and warning lamps (vehicles with LPG)
The control lamps indicate a number of different functions
and possible faults.
Fig. 49 Instrument panel control and warning lamps in vehicles with LPG
Item Symbol
Meaning of control and warning
lamps
Further infor-
mation
1
Red: Coolant level/coolant tempera-
ture
⇒ page 81
2
Blue: Cold engine warning
⇒ page 81
79Cockpit
Item Symbol
Meaning of control and warning
lamps
Further infor-
mation
3
(green)
The green lamp comes on when the
vehicle is in LPG mode.
The lamp goes off when you switch,
automatically or manually, to petrol
mode.
⇒ page 177
(yellow)
The yellow warning lamp lights up
when the petrol has reached the re-
serve level.
WARNING
● Failure to observe control lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
● The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to pre-
vent danger to third parties.
● The engine compartment is a dangerous area. Before you open the
bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must
switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or
other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings ⇒ page 235.
Note
● The appropriate control lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information messages in the display.
● In vehicles with warning or information messages on the screen, the ap-
propriate control lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information
message will also appear on the screen.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning sym-
bols (priority 2).
Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain
professional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will contin-
ue until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warn-
ing message.
Examples of priority 1 warning messages (red)
● Brake system symbol with the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID
INSTRUCTION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
● Coolant symbol with the warning message STOP SEE COOLANT IN-
STRUCTION MANUAL.
● Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning message STOP ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompa-
nied by one audible warning. Check the corresponding function as soon as
possible although the vehicle may be used without risk.
If several priority 2 warning messages are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. Af-
ter a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be
shown as a reminder at the side of the display.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
80 Cockpit
Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
messages have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning messages (yellow):
1)
● Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
● Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Top up the washer fluid level.
Information messages displayed on the screen*
Message
a)
Description
SERVICE
The service interval has ended. Take the vehicle to a
Technical Service.
IMMOBILISER
Immobiliser system active. The vehicle will not start. Take
the vehicle to a Technical Service.
ERROR
Instrument panel faulty. Take the vehicle to a Technical
Service.
CLEAN AIR FIL-
TER
Warning: The air filter must be cleaned
NO KEY Warning: Correct key cannot be found in the vehicle.
KEY BATTERY Warning: Key battery low. Change the battery.
CLUTCH
Warning: Press the clutch to start. In vehicles with man-
ual gearbox and Start-Stop system.
--> P/N
Warning: Place the selector level in position P/N to start.
Only in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
--> P
Warning: Place the selector lever in position P to stop the
engine.
STARTING
Warning: The engine starts automatically. Start-Stop sys-
tem activated.
START MANUAL-
LY
Warning: The engine must be started manually. Start-
Stop system activated.
ERROR START-
STOP
Warning: Start-Stop system error.
START-STOP IM-
POSSIBLE
Warning: Although the Start-Stop system is switched on,
the engine cannot be stopped automatically. Not all the
necessary conditions are met
START-STOP AC-
TIVE
Warning: Start-Stop system activated. Vehicle in Stop
mode.
SWITCH OFF
Warning: Start-Stop system activated. Switch off the igni-
tion when you leave the vehicle.
STOP TRANS-
MISSION TOO
HOT
Warning: Stop the engine. Gearbox overheated.
BRAKE
Warning: To start the engine, press the brake pedal. Only
in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
COASTING
FUNCTION
Warning: Coasting mode active. Transmission engaged.
Only in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
CHECK SAFE-
LOCK
Notification of central locking function activated.
a)
These messages may vary according the version of the vehicle model.
Fuel level/reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is under
the reserve level.
It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. You will also hear
an audible warning. It reminds you to fuel up the fuel tank as soon as possi-
ble ⇒ page 228.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
81Cockpit
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: PLEASE REFUEL!.
Coolant level* / temperature (red)
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
● The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
● The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, and
three acoustic warning signals ⇒
are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant tempera-
ture is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: CHECK COOLANT IN-
STRUCTION MANUAL ⇒ page 242.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle,
switch the engine off and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunc-
tion of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if
necessary ⇒ page 272.
If the control lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop
the vehicle and switch the engine off. Contact a Technical Service or a spe-
cialised workshop.
Coolant level too low
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: STOP CHECK COOL-
ANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity ⇒
.
WARNING
● If your vehicle is immobilised for technical reasons, move it to a safe
distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and
place the warning triangle.
● Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escap-
ing from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no
longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
● The engine compartment is a dangerous area. Before carrying out any
work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to
cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings ⇒ page 235.
Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL
Coolant temperature (blue)
This lamp lights up when the coolant is below approximately +45 °C
(+113 °F). When it exceeds this temperature the lamp turns off.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
82 Cockpit
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . For
further information see ⇒ page 115.
Turn signals
The control lamp flashes when the turn signals are in opera-
tion.
Depending on which turn signal is operating, either the left or right
turn signal lamp flashes. Both control lamps will flash at the same time
when the hazard warning lights are switched on.
If any of both turn signals fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice
faster than normal.
For further information on the turn signals, please see ⇒ page 122.
Engine management*
This warning lamp monitors the engine management sys-
tem for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched while the system operation is verified. It should go out once the
engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Glow plug system/engine fault
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating the diesel engine. It flashes if there is an engine
fault.
Control lamp is lit
The control lamp lights up while the glow plug system is preheating.
When the warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight
away.
Control lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,
the glow plug system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Main beam headlights
This control lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the
headlight flasher is operating.
For further information see ⇒ page 122.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter *
If the lamp lights up you should help the filter clean itself by driving in
the appropriate manner.
83Cockpit
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourth or fifth gear (automatic gear-
box: S gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h (37 mph), with the engine running
at approximately 2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is
burned. When cleaning is successful, the lamp turns off.
If the lamp does not turn off, or the three lamps turn on (particulate filter
, emission control system fault and glow plugs ), take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop to repair the fault.
WARNING
● Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain
and traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal ma-
noeuvres in surrounding traffic.
● The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high temper-
atures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Otherwise there is a risk of fire.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*
A control lamp monitors the ABS.
The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automat-
ic test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
● The control lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
● The control lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
● The control lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function.
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further
information on the ABS go to ⇒ page 196.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESC* control lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp
, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible
fault in the brake system ⇒
.
WARNING
● Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 235, Working in the engine compartment.
● If the brake system warning lamp should light up together with the
ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake
fluid level in the reservoir ⇒ page 249, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid lev-
el has dropped below the “MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of acci-
dent. Obtain technical assistance.
● If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may
have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the
rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to
break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assis-
tance.
Washer fluid*
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
⇒ page 244.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
84 Cockpit
The following message is shown on the instrument panel display*
1)
: REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should
go out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest special-
ised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessa-
ry because this will drain the battery.
Worn brake pads
If the symbol lights up, have the front brake pads (and, for safety rea-
sons, the rear pads as well) inspected by a specialised workshop.
Tyre pressure
The tyre pressure control system controls the tyre speed and
the frequency spectrum of each tyre.
Fig. 50 Centre console:
tyre monitor system but-
ton
The tyre control lamp
2)
compares wheel revolutions and with it, the wheel
diameter of each wheel using the ESC. If the diameter of a wheel changes,
the tyre control lamp lights up. The wheel diameter changes when:
● Tyre pressure is insufficient.
● The tyre structure is damaged.
● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
● The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving
with a trailer or on extreme slopes).
● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
2)
Depending on the model version
85Cockpit
● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
● The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more
wheels, the button ⇒ Fig. 50 must be kept pressed while the ignition is on
until an audible warning is heard and the warning lamp goes out.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value
for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre moni-
tor system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure control lamp lights up
If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set
by the driver, the tyre control warning lamp lights up ⇒
.
The tyre pressure control lamp flashes
If the tyre pressure control lamp flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the
nearest specialised workshop.
WARNING
● When the tyre pressure control lamp lights up, reduce speed immedi-
ately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible,
and check the tyre pressure and status.
● The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. For
this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.
● Under certain circumstances (for example, when driving in a sports-
like manner, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp
may light up or function incorrectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp lights up after
turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.
Brake system*
This warning lamp lights up if the brake fluid level is too low
or if there is a fault in the system.
This warning lamp lights up if
● the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 249.
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: STOP BRAKE FLUID
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
● there is a fault in the brake system.
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: BRAKE SYSTEM
FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
This warning lamp can light up together with the ABS system warning lamp.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
86 Cockpit
WARNING
● Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 235.
● If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driv-
ing, the brake fluid level ⇒ page 249, Brake fluid in the reservoir is too
low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain techni-
cal assistance.
● If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could
cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause
the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek tech-
nical assistance.
Handbrake
This lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) with the handbrake on, the following
message will appear on the instrument panel display
1)
: HANDBRAKE ON. You
will also hear an acoustic warning signal ⇒ page 188.
Bulb defect*
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's ex-
terior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: LEFT FULL BEAM
FAULTY.
Engine oil pressure
If this warning lamp is red it indicates that the engine oil
pressure is too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible
warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If necessary, add
more oil ⇒ page 238.
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: STOP ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. Do
not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.
Checking the oil level
If the warning lamp is yellow the engine oil level should be checked as
soon as possible. Top up the oil ⇒ page 241 at the next opportunity.
Oil level sensor faulty*
If the yellow warning lamp flashes, take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop to have the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to
check the oil level every time you refuel.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
87Cockpit
Cruise speed (Cruise control)*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched
on. For further information on the cruise control system, see ⇒ page 193.
Indicator for open doors or rear lid*
This warning lamp lights up if one of the doors or the rear
lid is open.
The warning light should go off when all the doors are closed correctly.
The system also works when the ignition is switched off. It should go off ap-
prox. 15 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
Electromechanical steering*
For vehicles with power steering, the level of steering assistance depends
on the vehicle's speed and on the steering angle.
The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.
If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the en-
gine running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50
m.
There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does
not go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The warning lamp
may appear in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this
indicates a minor fault. If it lights red, seek assistance from a specialised
workshop immediately, as the steering assistance is not working; in this
case you should not keep driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assis-
tance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the engine
is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you will
need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the power
steering is not working correctly or at all.
For those vehicles fitted with ESC*, the “Steering manoeuvre recommenda-
tion” function is included. See ⇒ page 198.
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Control lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the
engine checked.
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: EXHAUST GAS SEE
WORKSHOP.
Control lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.
The following message is shown in the instrument panel display: EXHAUST
GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
88 Cockpit
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* /
There are two control lamps for the electronic stability con-
trol. The lamp provides information concerning the func-
tion and the provides information on the disconnection
status
Both lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should
go out after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and ASR. This also includes the
brake assistance system (BAS), automatic cleaning of the brake discs and
the trailer stability programme (TSP).
The warning lamp has the following functions:
● It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC is activated.
● It will light up continuously if there is a fault in the ESC.
● As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, it will also light up if a
fault should occur in the ABS.
If the ESC control lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESC.
In this case the ESC can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and
then on again. If the control lamp goes out, this means the system is fully
functional.
The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the
system:
● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected when pressing the switch.
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped
with the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS control lamp . Take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further informa-
tion on the EDL see ⇒ page 199, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.
Traction control system (ASR)* /
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
There are two warning lamps for the traction control system: and . Both
lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go out
after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.
The lamp has the following function:
● It flashes when the ASR is working if the vehicle is moving.
If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will re-
main lit. The warning lamp will also light up if a fault should occur in the
ABS because the ASR operates in conjunction with the ABS. For further in-
formation, see ⇒ page 196, Brakes.
The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the
system:
● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected when pressing the ASR OFF
switch.
By pressing it again, the ASR function is reactivated and the warning lamp
switched off.
89Cockpit
Operating the foot brake
The brake pedal must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This
is necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Electronic immobiliser* “Safe”
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser au-
tomatically when the key is inserted into the ignition. The electronic immo-
biliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out
of the ignition lock.
The instrument panel displays the following message
1)
: IMMOBILISER. The
vehicle cannot be used in that case ⇒ page 174.
The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
key is used.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
90 Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel controls
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possi-
ble to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the
automatic gearbox*, without requiring the driver to be distracted from driv-
ing.
There are three versions of the multifunction module:
● Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering
wheel.
● Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and
the telephone system from the steering wheel.
Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, Audio CD,
mp3 CD, iPod
1)
/USB
1)
/SD
1)
) and the Radio navigation system, in which
case they also control the Navigation system.
● Version for automatic gearbox* ⇒ page 186.
1)
If fitted in the vehicle.
91Steering wheel controls
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 51 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 52 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX ⇒ table on page 92
A
Volume up Volume up Volume up
B
Volume down Volume down Volume down
C
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No function specified
D
Search for last station
Previous track
Hold down: Rewind
No function specified
E
No function specified No function specified No function specified
F
Mute Pause Mute
G
a)
Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display
Next preset
b)
Next track
b)
No function specified
b)
H
a)
Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display
Previous preset
b)
Previous track
b)
No function specified
b)
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
92 Steering wheel controls
I
a)
Next preset Change folder No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
J
a)
Previous preset Change folder No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
K
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
L
a)
Change source Change source Change source
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
a)
Depending on the model version
b)
Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 53 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 54 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX TELEPHONE
A
Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up
B
Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down
93Steering wheel controls
C
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No function specified No function specified
D
Search for last station
Previous track
Hold down: Rewind
No function specified No function specified
E
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instru-
ment panel
Access telephone menu on in-
strument panel
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incoming
call
F
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition
Activate voice control/
Interrupt current message/
Deactivate voice control
G
Next preset
a)
Next track
a)
No function specified
Previous option in the menu/
list/
selection shown on instru-
ment panel
b)
H
Previous preset
a)
Previous track
a)
No function specified
Next option in the menu/
list/
selection shown on instru-
ment panel
b)
I
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
J
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
K
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Confirm
L
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Back to last-opened menu
a)
Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
b)
Only if the instrument panel is in the “TELEPHONE” menu. Examples of use: Agenda, List of calls, Select numbers, Select letters, Main menu.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
94 Steering wheel controls
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Fig. 55 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 56 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE
A
Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up
B
Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down
C
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No function specified No function specified No function specified
D
Search for last station
Previous track
Hold down: Rewind
No function specified No function specified No function specified
95Steering wheel controls
E
No function specified No function specified No function specified No function specified
Accept incoming call
(press briefly)
Reject incoming call
(press and hold down)
End ongoing call /estab-
lish call (press briefly)
Switch to private mode
(press and hold down)
Redial last number (press
and hold down)
a)
F
Activation of voice recogni-
tion for mobile phone con-
nected to the system (if the
phone has this function)* /
MUTE
Activation of voice recognition
for mobile phone connected to
the system (if the phone has
this function)* / MUTE
Activation of voice recog-
nition for mobile phone
connected to the system
(if the phone has this
function)* / MUTE
Activation of voice recog-
nition for mobile phone
connected to the system
(if the phone has this
function)* / MUTE
Activation of voice recog-
nition for mobile phone
connected to the system
(if the phone has this
function)* / MUTE
G
Next preset
b)
Next track
b)
No function specified
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel/No function speci-
fied
H
Previous preset
b)
Previous track
b)
No function specified
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel/No function speci-
fied
I
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
No function specified
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
J
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
No function specified
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
K
Operates on instrument pan-
el
Operates on instrument panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel/No function speci-
fied
L
Operates on instrument pan-
el
Operates on instrument panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel/No function speci-
fied
a)
For a more detailed description of how to use this button, please refer to the Radio navigation System User Handbook (SEAT Media System)
b)
Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
96 Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Central locking
Basic functions
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock
all doors and the rear lid by just pushing the button.
Description
Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:
● the key, by inserting it into the driver door cylinder and rotating it man-
ually,
● the central lock button in the vehicle interior ⇒ page 99.
● the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key,
⇒ page 104
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:
Deadlock system
Selective unlocking system*
Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking
Emergency unlocking system
Unlocking the vehicle*
Press button
⇒ Fig. 62 on remote control to unlock all the doors and
rear lid.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Locking the vehicle*
Press button
⇒ Fig. 62 on the remote control to lock all doors and
the rear lid or turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the rear lid.
WARNING
● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of
emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their
own.
● Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have
fatal consequences. Close and lock both the rear lid and all the other
doors when you are not using the vehicle.
● Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse
of the keys, for example, by children, may result in serious damage and
accident.
– The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.
– If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti-
vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.
– The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could
become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation.
– Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
● Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The
steering lock could suddenly engage, and you would not be able to steer
the vehicle.
–
97Opening and closing
Note
● While the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the re-
mote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.
● If the driver door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver door is
unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched
on, the door deadlock function is deactivated (although the doors remain
locked) and the central lock button is activated. See ⇒ page 106.
● If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver door control
lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.
● For anti-theft security, only the driver door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
“Safe” Security system*
The deadlock function makes it more difficult to break into
the vehicle because the door release lever and the central
lock button are not active (depending upon country).
Activating the deadlock
– Press once the locking button
on the remote control. or
– Turn the key once in the driver door lock to lock. A warning lamp
in the driver door flashes to indicate the deadlock is working.
The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at short in-
tervals and then more slowly.
Deactivating the deadlock when the vehicle is locked
– Press the lock button
on the remote control twice within two
seconds. The vehicle is locked without activating the deadlock.
The driver door warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds
and then goes out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts flashing
again.
The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside if the deadlock has
not been activated. You will have to pull the door release lever once. When
the deadlock is off, the anti-theft alarm* ⇒ page 106 remains active. The
vehicle interior monitoring system* and the anti-tow system are deactiva-
ted*.
WARNING
Nobody should remain in the vehicle if the deadlock system mechanism
has been activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside.
Locked doors could make it more difficult to assist vehicle occupants in
the event of an accident. People could become trapped inside in an emer-
gency.
Selective unlocking system*
This system allows to unlock either just the driver door or all
the vehicle.
Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote
once.
The Safe system for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the driver door is un-
locked and both the alarm and the warning lamp are also turned off.
Unlocking all doors and the luggage compartment
The unlock button on the remote control must be pressed twice
so that
all doors and the luggage compartment can be opened.
Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle, to
unlock all doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning lamp
and the alarm (only vehicles fitted with one) are turned off.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
98 Opening and closing
Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking
system*
This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehi-
cle from the outside when it is running (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and rear lid will lock automatically if the speed of 15 km/h
(9 mph) is exceeded.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph), the unlocked
door(s) will be locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the ig-
nition.
Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for
example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever
inside the door.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the
door would open.
Automatic locking system for involuntary unlocking*
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the unintentional un-
locking of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked and any of the doors (including the rear lid) are
opened within 30 seconds, it gets re-locked automatically. This function
prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlock button is press-
ed by mistake.
Emergency unlocking system
If the airbags are triggered during an accident, the vehicle is unlocked, ex-
cept for the luggage compartment. It is possible to lock the vehicle from in-
side with the central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on
again.
If the doors must be locked from the outside, see “Emergency locking of the
doors”.
99Opening and closing
Central lock button
The central lock button allows you to lock and unlock the ve-
hicle from the inside.
Fig. 57 Detailed view of
the centre console: cen-
tral lock button
Locking the vehicle
– Press the button
⇒ .
Unlocking the doors
– Press button
.
The central lock button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except when the deadlock system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central lock but-
ton:
● Locking the doors and rear lid prevents access from the outside (for
safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).
● The driver door and/or front passenger door cannot be locked if any of
the vehicle doors (except the rear lid) are open. This avoids the user from
forgetting his key inside the vehicle.
● Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central lock
button for 30 seconds. Once this time has passed, the button if operative
again.
● There is a danger of leaving the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is
locked by the central locking button when the driver door is closed and any
of the rear doors open. On closing any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks
and the keys remain inside it.
● All doors can be locked separately from inside the vehicle. Do this by
pulling the door release lever once.
WARNING
● If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped
inside it.
● The central lock button is not operative in the following cases:
● When the vehicle is locked from the outside (with the remote control
or the key).
● While the ignition is not activated after unlocking the door lock cylin-
der with the key.
Note
● Vehicle locked, amber button
.
● Vehicle unlocked, red button
.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
100 Opening and closing
Unlocking and locking - Manual personalisation
Activating selective unlocking
With the driver door open, turn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s
Deactivating selective unlocking
With the driver door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s
The turn signal lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.
Activation of automatic locking
Press the lock button
on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
Deactivation of automatic locking
Press the unlock button
on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of cen-
tral locking system failure.
Fig. 58 Locking the
doors manually
Locking the driver door manually
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
the left hand side door and anticlockwise for the right hand side door.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Manual (emergency) locking of the remaining doors
Open the door and remove the cap
A
⇒
Fig. 58 printed with a lock image.
This will expose a circular element with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
into the groove and rotate the element clockwise for the right hand side
doors and anticlockwise for the left hand side doors.
Replace the cap and close the door. Once the door has been closed it can
no longer be opened from the outside.
101Opening and closing
Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver door
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anticlockwise for the left
hand side doors and clockwise for the right hand side doors.
The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior
door handle.
Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors
First the driver door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate
the internal door handle for the required door. If the childproof lock is acti-
vated on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the
door is unlocked but does not open. The door must be opened from the out-
side.
Note
Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency lock-
ing), repeat the previous instructions.
Childproof lock
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from
opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.
Fig. 59 Childproof lock
on the left hand side door
Fig. 60 Childproof lock
on the right hand side
door
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
102 Opening and closing
This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and
locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated
and deactivated manually, as described below:
Activating the childproof lock
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to acti-
vate the childproof lock.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the left hand side doors, and anticlock-
wise for the right hand side doors ⇒ Fig. 59 ⇒ Fig. 60.
Deactivating the childproof lock
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you
want to deactivate.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the right hand side doors, and anticlock-
wise for the left hand side doors ⇒ Fig. 59 ⇒ Fig. 60.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the
outside. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated by inserting
the key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
Keys
Set of keys
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a re-
mote control and a plastic key tab*.
Fig. 61 Set of keys
The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
● one remote control key
⇒
Fig. 61
A
with folding key bit,
● one key without remote control
B
,
● a plastic key tab*
C
.
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, go to a Technical Service with your vehicle
identification number.
103Opening and closing
WARNING
● An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries.
● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of
emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their
own.
● An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any
electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The
doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an
obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation.
● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your
vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with
you when you leave the vehicle.
● Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion.
Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible
to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
There are electronic components in the remote control key. Avoid wetting
and hitting the keys.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
104 Opening and closing
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The radio frequency remote control key is used to lock and
unlock the vehicle from a distance.
Fig. 62 Assignment of
buttons on the remote
control key
Fig. 63 Range of the ra-
dio frequency remote
control
Using the button
⇒
Fig. 62 (arrow) on the control, the key blade is released.
Unlocking the vehicle
⇒
Fig. 62
1
.
Locking the vehicle
⇒
Fig. 62
2
.
Unlocking the rear lid. Press button
⇒
Fig. 62
3
until all the turn signals
on the vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking button
3
is pressed,
you have 2 minutes to open the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
again.
Also, the battery indicator on the key
⇒
Fig. 62, will flash.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key.
The receiver is inside the vehicle. The maximum range depends on different
factors. The range is reduced as the batteries start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button
⇒
Fig. 62
1
, is pressed once, the driver door is un-
locked, all others remain locked.
Press the button
⇒
Fig. 62
1
twice to unlock all doors.
105Opening and closing
WARNING
● An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.
● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of
emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their
own.
● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result
in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always
take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
● An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any
electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The
vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could com-
plicate the aid in case of emergency.
Note
● The radio frequency remote control can be programmed by means of
pressing the unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will un-
lock. When the button is pressed once more, all doors and the rear lid will
be unlocked.
● The radio frequency remote control functions only when you are in range
⇒ Fig. 63 (red area).
● If the vehicle is unlocked using the
1
button, it will lock again auto-
matically if any of the doors or the rear lid are not opened within 30 sec-
onds after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining
unlocked if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.
● If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the radio frequency re-
mote control, the remote control key will have to be re-synchronised
⇒ page 105.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed, the bat-
tery must be replaced.
CAUTION
The use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote
control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the
same size and power.
For the sake of the environment
Used batteries must be disposed of at an appropriate waste facility or
through an authorised service, given that their components can affect the
environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door with the remote
control, it should be re-synchronised.
– Press the
⇒ Fig. 62 button on the remote control.
– Then close the vehicle using the key bit within one minute.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with
the remote control if the button
is repeatedly pressed outside of the ef-
fective range of the radio frequency remote control. The remote control key
will have to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available in your Technical Service, where
they must be matched to the locking system.
Up to four remote control keys can be used.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
106 Opening and closing
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are
detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the vehicle is opened using
the key, or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when locking the
vehicle. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are car-
ried out when the vehicle is locked:
● Opening the vehicle mechanically using the key and with the ignition off
● Opening a door
● Opening the bonnet
● Opening the rear lid
● Switching on the ignition
● Movements in the vehicle interior
● Undue manipulation of the alarm
● Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound and the turn signals flash for approx. 30 sec-
onds. This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
If the radio frequency remote control function fails, you will have to use the
key to unlock the vehicle. This is done as follows:
● Unfold the key by pressing the button shown by the (arrow).
● Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft
alarm system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered immediately.
● Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key and deacti-
vates the anti-theft alarm system. If you do not switch on the ignition within
15 seconds, the alarm is triggered (in certain markets, such as the Nether-
lands, there is no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is activated imme-
diately after opening the door).
Opening all the doors in manual mode
In vehicles without alarm, when opening the driver door manually all the
doors are opened.
How to switch the alarm off
When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlocking button of the radio frequen-
cy remote control or when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
Note
● If, after the audible warning goes off, another monitored area is ac-
cessed (e.g. the rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm
is triggered again.
● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or
not working for any reason.
● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
nected while the alarm system is active.
107Opening and closing
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft
alarm* which detects unauthorized vehicle entry by means
of ultrasound.
The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
Activation
– It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the but-
ton
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
– Press the button
on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains activa-
ted.
WARNING
● The deadlock system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is
deactivated.
● For those vehicles in which a separation screen is fitted, the alarm
will not function correctly due to interference with the sensor.
Note
● If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be in-
dicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver door when the vehi-
cle is opened. This flashing will be different to that for an activated alarm.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
108 Opening and closing
Rear lid
Unlocking and locking
The rear lid opening system operates electrically. It is activa-
ted by using the handle on the rear lid.
Fig. 64 Rear lid: opening
from the outside
Fig. 65 Close-up of the
inside trim of the rear lid:
hand grip
Opening the rear lid
– Pull on the release lever and lift the rear lid ⇒ Fig. 64. The rear
lid will automatically open.
Closing the rear lid
– Hold the rear lid by one of the two handles on the interior lining
and close it, pushing slightly.
This system may or may not be operative, depending on the situation of the
vehicle.
If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
then the opening system is operative and the rear lid may be opened.
To lock/unlock, press the button
or the button
1
on the remote control
key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or
not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if the rear lid is
opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
109Opening and closing
WARNING
● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of accident or injury.
● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the
rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex-
pectedly while driving.
● Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have
fatal consequences. Close and lock both the rear lid and all the other
doors when you are not using the vehicle.
● Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could
cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is
in the path of the rear lid.
● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may
penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle
will not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking
does not operate (for example, if the battery is flat)
Fig. 66 Rear lid: emer-
gency open
There is a groove in the luggage compartment allowing access to
the emergency opening mechanism.
Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage compartment
– Insert the key in the groove and unlock the locking system, turn-
ing the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow ⇒ Fig. 66.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
110 Opening and closing
Windows
Opening or closing the electric windows
The front and rear electric windows can be operated by us-
ing the controls on the driver door.
Fig. 67 Detail of the
driver door: controls for
the front and rear win-
dows
Opening and closing the windows
– Press the button
to open the window.
– Pull button
to close the window ⇒ .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
⇒
.
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons on the driver door
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear
doors
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch *
Safety switch
3
on the driver door can be used to disable the electric win-
dow buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.
WARNING
● Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
● Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to
do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make
sure that no one is in the path of a window.
● Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. An uncontrolled use of the key could start
the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows),
causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote con-
trol key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency
situation.
1
2
3
4
5
111Opening and closing
WARNING (Continued)
● The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from
the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
● If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric win-
dows. Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an ob-
struction, the window will automatically open again ⇒ page 111. If this
happens, check why the window could not be closed before attempting to
close it again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
– Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The
window closes fully.
One-touch opening
– Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.
The window opens fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
– Close all windows.
– Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch func-
tion is now ready for operation.
The buttons ⇒ Fig. 67
1
and
2
have two levels for opening the window
and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows to the
desired position.
One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off,
even if the key is in the ignition.
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been
temporarily disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The function then has to
be reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a mal-
function in the electric windows. Contact a specialised workshop.
Roll-back function
The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk
of injuries when the windows are closing.
● If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops
at this point and lowers immediately ⇒
.
● If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds
the normal automatic function resumes.
● If the window is still obstructed, the window will stop at this point.
● If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to
close it again within 5 seconds.
If you wait longer than 5 - 10 seconds, the window will open fully when you
operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a mal-
function in the electric windows. Contact a specialised workshop.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
112 Opening and closing
WARNING
● Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
● Always take the ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle, even
if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children
are never left alone inside the vehicle.
● The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from
the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
● Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to
do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make
sure that no one is in the path of a window.
● Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehi-
cle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergen-
cy.
Note
The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the out-
side of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
⇒ page 112.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock or unlock button on the remote control for about 3
seconds. All windows which function electrically will be either
opened or closed.
– Release the unlock button to interrupt the function.
– Once the windows are completely closed, the turn signals will
flash.
Sliding/tilting sunroof*
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof
The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the
rotary knob when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 68 Roof lining de-
scription: sliding/tilting
sunroof rotary knob
113Opening and closing
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position
A
⇒ Fig. 68 ⇒ .
Opening the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position
B
. The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
– To open the roof further, turn the switch to position
C
and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position
D
.
Always close the sliding/tilting sunroof fully if you park the vehicle or leave
it unattended ⇒
.
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about 10 minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sun visor
The sun visor is opened together with the sliding/tilting sunroof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
● Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
● Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without checking there are no
obstructions, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and oth-
ers. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
● Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
WARNING (Continued)
● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! The doors can be locked using
the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in
an emergency situation.
● The sliding/tilting sunroof continues to function until one of the front
doors is opened and the key removed from the ignition.
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in the locking
position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Release the unlock button to interrupt the function.
– When the sliding/tilting sunroof has closed completely, the turn
signals flash once.
Note
The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and
will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
114 Opening and closing
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting sunroof*
Fig. 69 Roof lining de-
scription: sliding/tilting
sunroof rotary knob
The sliding/tilting sunroof has a roll-back function which prevents larger ob-
jects getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does
not prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The sliding/
tilting sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed when
closing.
If the sliding/tilting sunroof has been opened again by the roll-back func-
tion, it can be closed only by pressing the rotary button at the front in posi-
tion
A
⇒
Fig. 69 until the sliding/tilting sunroof has closed fully. Please
note that the sunroof will now close without the roll-back function.
115Lights and visibility
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Fig. 70 Detailed view of
the dash panel: lights,
fog lights and rear fog
light switch
Switching on the side lights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ Fig. 70 to position .
Switching on dipped beam headlights
– Turn the light switch to position .
Switching off the lights
– Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on front fog lights*
– Pull the switch out of position or to the first stop. The
symbol in the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position or to the second stop ⇒
.
A control lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
– Pull the light switch from position to the last stop. A control
lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights
are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that
other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam head-
lights if it is dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
● The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side
lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.
● If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition
lock, an audible warning will sound while the driver door remains open. This
is a reminder to switch the lights off.
● The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
116 Lights and visibility
● If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the vehicle will automat-
ically be switched off.
● The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
● Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and rear
lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has no influence
on the useful life of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when
they are switched on.
Automatic lighting*
Fig. 71 Automatic light-
ing
Activation
– Rotate the switch to the position. This indication will light
up.
Deactivation
– Turn the light switch to .
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped beam headlights are
automatically switched on by a photosensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
example.
The rain sensor switches on the dipped beam headlights when the wind-
screen wipers have been operating continuously for a few seconds and it
switches the lights off when the continuous or interval wipe is switched off
for some minutes ⇒ page 129.
When the automatic dipped beam light control is connected but the dipped
beam lights are off, the warning lamp lights up on the light control
⇒ Fig. 71. If the automatic control switches on the dipped lights, the instru-
ment and control lighting is also switched on.
WARNING
● Even if the automatic headlight control is switched on, the dipped
beam headlights will not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the dipped
beam must be switched on manually.
Note
● For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is
removed from the ignition, the audible warning will only sound if the light
control is in the position or if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
home function.
● If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog
lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
● The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
● To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the rear lid go
off when the rear lid is opened (depending on the country).
117Lights and visibility
Daytime driving lights*
The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing
the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are
enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is
automatically switched off when the side lights are turned
on.
Daytime running lights are signalling devices for improving road safety. The
lights are built into the headlights and come on each time the ignition is
turned on if the light switch is in position 0 or .
Automatic control of the dipped beam in combination with the daytime
running lights
If the dipped beam control and the daytime running lights are activated at
the same time, the dipped beams and the instrument panel lighting will au-
tomatically come on as required (e.g. when entering a tunnel) and the day-
time running lights will switch off. When the automatic dipped beam control
switches off the dipped beams (e.g. when coming out of a tunnel), the day-
time running lights come back on.
Activating the daytime driving lights
● Remove the key from the ignition, move the turn signal lever upwards
(right turn signal), press it backwards to flash position and hold it in this po-
sition.
● Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime lights are activated and
can be switched on.
Switching off daytime driving lights
● Remove the key from the ignition, move the turn signal lever downwards
(left turn signal), press it backwards to flash position and hold it in this po-
sition.
● Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime lights are deactivated
and cannot be switched on.
Note
Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your
country.
Nordic country solution
1)
The so-called “Nordic country solution” is an alternative solution to daytime
running lights in vehicles without this function. It consists of simultaneous-
ly connecting the dimmed dipped beams, the sidelights and the licence
plate lights.
Said lights come on each time the ignition is turned on if the light switch is
in position 0 or . Depending upon the model, the control lamp on the
light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel will indicate
that the lighting is on.
Activation of the Nordic country solution
● Remove the key from the ignition, move the turn signal lever upwards
(right turn signal), press it backwards to flash position and hold it in this po-
sition.
● Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The Nordic country solution is now
activated and the corresponding lights may come on.
1)
Only available in certain countries or as an optional extra.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
118 Lights and visibility
Deactivation of the Nordic country solution
● Remove the key from the ignition, move the turn signal lever downwards
(left turn signal), press it backwards to flash position and hold it in this po-
sition.
● Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The Nordic country solution is now
deactivated and the corresponding lights will not come on.
Coming/leaving home function*
The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The Leav-
ing Home function is controlled with a photosensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side
and dipped lights, the tail lights and the number plate light will light up to
provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and
briefly flashing the lights. When the driver door is opened, the Coming
Home lighting comes on. If the driver door is already open when the lights
are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the rear lid is closed, the Coming Home
function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
● On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching
off the lights after all the vehicle doors and the rear lid have been closed.
● If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the rear lid remain
open.
● If the light switch is turned to position .
● If the ignition is switched on.
Leaving home function
The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:
● the light control is in position and
● the photosensor detects “darkness”.
The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
● If the time period for the delay in switching off the headlights has ended
● If the vehicle is locked again.
● If the light switch is turned to position .
● If the ignition is switched on.
Note
The setting for the delay in switching off the headlights in the Coming Home
and Leaving Home function can be changed or the function can be connec-
ted or disconnected in the menu Lights and visibility ⇒ page 74.
● If the ignition key is removed while the lights are on, and the lights are
flashed briefly and the driver door opened, no audible warning is heard, as
when the Coming Home function is on, the lights are automatically switched
off after a period of time (except when the light switch is in position or
.
119Lights and visibility
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Fig. 72 Dash panel: reg-
ulation for instrument
and switch lighting and
headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
1
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments
and switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning
the thumb wheel
⇒
Fig. 72
1
.
The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination
and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-
rated in the instrument panel.
The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the igni-
tion is on and the vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed
automatically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when the
ambient light level is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver
to switch on the dipped beam headlights in good time when light condi-
tions become poor.
Headlight range control
2
By using the electrical headlight range control,
2
you can adjust the head-
light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it
is possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the
same time, by using the correct headlight settings, the driver has the best
possible lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down
2
from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge lamps (“xenon lamps”) are equipped with dy-
namic headlight range control. This means that the headlights will be ad-
justed to suit the load level of the vehicle and “nodding movements” when
pulling off and braking are automatically compensated for.
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs do not have headlight range control.
Adaptive headlights* (for driving round bends)
When driving around bends, the headlights will light the
most important areas of the road.
Fig. 73 Cornering light-
ing using adaptive head-
lights
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
120 Lights and visibility
Dynamic cornering lights* (AFS)
The dynamic cornering lights only operate if the vehicle is travelling at more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) and the dipped headlights are on. When taking a
bend, the road is illuminated better with directional gas discharge bulbs
than with conventional fixed headlights.
A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on
the instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or
instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument
panel display. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault
repaired.
If the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel but all the bulbs are
operating correctly ⇒ page 274, there may still be a fault in the dynamic
curve lighting system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and
have the fault repaired.
WARNING
If the “automatic dipped beam control” is switched on, the dipped beam
headlights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on
manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for
the correct use of lights in all situations. “Automatic headlight control”
is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the
lights manually using the light switch.
Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL
Fog lights with cornering function*
When the turn signal is switched on to turn or on very tight bends, the right
or left fog light automatically comes on to function as a cornering light. The
cornering light only operates if the dipped beam lights are on.
WARNING
If the “automatic dipped beam control” is switched on, the dipped beam
headlights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on
manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for
the correct use of lights in all situations. “Automatic headlight control”
is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the
lights manually using the light switch.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
Fig. 74 Dash panel:
switch for hazard warning
lights
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights
⇒
.
121Lights and visibility
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear. On an automatic gear-
box, move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road
users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehi-
cle.
Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for example:
● reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,
● there is an emergency
● your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,
● you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal
lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard warning lights
also work when the ignition is switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than
80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times per second to warn
vehicles driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights
will come on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They
switch off automatically when the vehicle starts to move again.
WARNING
● The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always
use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the atten-
tion of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
● Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt
petrol. This could start a fire!
Note
● The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a
long time, even if the ignition is switched off.
● The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rel-
evant statutory requirements.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
122 Lights and visibility
Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the park-
ing lights and the headlight flasher.
Fig. 75 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn signals
– Move the lever all the way up ⇒ Fig. 75
1
to indicate right, and
all the way down
2
to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
– Push the lever up
1
or down
2
to the point where you incur
resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several
times. The corresponding control lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on and off
– If the dipped lights are on, push the lever forward ⇒ Fig. 75
3
to switch on the main beam.
– Push the lever towards the steering wheel ⇒ Fig. 75
4
to
switch off the main beam.
Headlight flashers
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel
4
to operate the
flasher.
Switching on parking lights
– Switch the ignition off and remove the key from the lock.
– Move the turn signal lever up or down to turn the right or left-
hand parking lights on, respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the
main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
Note
● The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp or flashes in the instrument panel. The control
lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is
correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is de-
fective, the control lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn signal
bulbs are damaged, control lamp does not light up. Change the bulb.
● The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the instru-
ment panel.
123Lights and visibility
● The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever – even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the
instrument panel.
● When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will on-
ly work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on,
an audible warning will be emitted while the driver door is open.
● If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened.
This is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to
leave the parking light on.
Interior lights
Front interior light type 1
Fig. 76 Interior roof trim:
front interior lighting
The switch
⇒
Fig. 76
A
is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lighting is auto-
matically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from
the ignition. And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The
interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the igni-
tion is switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O ⇒ Fig. 76.
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has been removed and
the courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from dis-
charging.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
124 Lights and visibility
Front interior light type 2
Fig. 77 Interior roof trim:
front interior lighting
The switch
⇒
Fig. 77
A
is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lighting is auto-
matically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from
the ignition. And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The
interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the igni-
tion is switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O
⇒
Fig. 77.
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has been removed and
the courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from dis-
charging.
125Lights and visibility
Front reading lights
Fig. 78 Interior roof trim:
front reading lights, type
1
Fig. 79 Interior roof trim:
front reading lights, type
2
Switching on the reading light
Press the corresponding button ⇒ Fig. 78
B
and ⇒ Fig. 79
B
to switch on
the reading light.
Switching the reading lights off
Press the corresponding button to switch the reading light off.
Rear interior lights and reading lights*
Fig. 80 Interior roof trim:
rear interior lights and
reading lights.
The switch
⇒
Fig. 80
C
is used to select the following positions:
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position
⇒
Fig. 80
1
, the interior and reading lights are switched
off.
Switching on the reading light
Turn the switch to position
2
(left reading light) or to position
4
(right
reading light).
Courtesy light position
Turn the control to position
3
. The interior lighting is automatically switch-
ed on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition.
The light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
126 Lights and visibility
lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position
5
.
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has been removed and
the courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from dis-
charging.
Visibility
Sun visors
Fig. 81 Sun visor on the
driver side
The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of
their mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors
⇒ Fig. 81
1
.
The vanity mirrors in the sun visors have covers. When you open the cover
2
, a lamp in the roof lights up.
The light* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is push-
ed back or the sun visor is pushed back up.
Note
The roof lamp will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the ig-
nition key. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Applies to the model: ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK
Sun blind*
The windows on the rear doors are fitted with a sun blind
Fig. 82 Rear door sun vi-
sor
127Lights and visibility
Rear door sun blind*
– Pull out the visor and hook it onto the hooks at the top of the
door frame ⇒ Fig. 82.
Windscreen wipers
Front windscreen wipers
The window wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers and
the automatic wash and wipe.
Fig. 83 Windscreen wip-
er and windscreen wash
lever
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ Fig. 83 has the following positions:
Switching off the windscreen wipers
– Move the lever to position
0
.
Interval wipe
– Move the lever up to position
1
.
– Move the control
A
to the left or right to set the length of the
wipe intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the
right: short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set us-
ing switch
A
.
Slow wipe
– Move the lever up to position
2
.
Continuous wipe
– Move the lever up to position
3
.
Short wipe
– Move the lever down to position
4
to give the windscreen a
short wipe. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the
lever pressed down for longer than two seconds.
Wash and wipe automatic system
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position
5
. The
wash function will start immediately and the wipers will start
with a slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at
the same time at speeds of over 120 km/h (75 mph).
– Release the lever. The wipers will keep running for approximate-
ly four seconds.
Heated windscreen in the wiper blade area*
In some countries and with some versions, there is the possibility of heat-
ing the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to
aid de-icing in the zone. The function is switched on by pressing the heated
rear window key .
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
128 Lights and visibility
WARNING
● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and safety levels while
driving.
● In cold conditions, you should not use the wash/wipe system unless
you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation sys-
tem. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the wind-
screen and obscure your view of the road.
● Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 245.
CAUTION
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wind-
screen wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you
could damage both the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note
● The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
● In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will on-
ly work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.
● When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the
lever is moved to position 0, they are totally hidden.
● The next speed down will automatically be selected if wiper speed
2
⇒ Fig. 83 or
3
is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed will be
resumed when the vehicle starts again
● The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds
once the “automatic wipe/wash system” has been operated, provided the
vehicle is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three
seconds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work again, you have to turn the ignition
off and then on again.
● When the “interval wipe function” is on, the intervals are directly propor-
tional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the
intervals.
● The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the ob-
stacle and switch the wiper back on again.
● Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of
the windscreen, always move the wiper arms to the service position (hori-
zontal).
● The heat output of the heated jets is controlled automatically when the
ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.
129Lights and visibility
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Fig. 84 Rain sensor*
Fig. 85 Windscreen wip-
er lever
Switching on the rain sensor
– Move the windscreen wiper lever into position
1
⇒ Fig. 85.
– Move the control
A
to the left or right to set the sensitivity of
the rain sensor. Control to the right: highly sensitive. Control to
the left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the interval wipe function. You will have to switch
the rain sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. This is done by switch-
ing the wiper interval wipe function off and back on.
Note
● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor. This
may cause sensor disruption or faults.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
130 Lights and visibility
Rear window wiper
The window wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper and
the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Fig. 86 Windscreen wip-
er and windscreen wash
lever: rear window wiper
Switching on the interval wipe
– Press the lever forwards to position
6
⇒ Fig. 86. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
– Pull the lever back from position
6
towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you
switch off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the windscreen wiper and washer system
– Press the lever fully forwards to position
7
⇒ Fig. 86. The wash
function will start immediately and the wiper will start with a
slight delay. The windscreen wash system will function as long
as you hold the lever in this position.
– Release the lever. The wiper then wipes for approximately 4 sec-
onds, and then in intervals again.
– Release the lever. The washer system stops and the wipers
function.
WARNING
● A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
● Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 245.
CAUTION
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the
glass before using the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the wiper
when the wiper blade is frozen to the glass, this could damage both the
wiper blade and the wiper motor.
Note
● The windscreen wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on
and the rear lid is closed.
● In reverse gear, with the windscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
screen wiper will make one wipe.
Headlight washer*
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the window wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds – provided the dipped beam headlights or
main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the
headlights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
131Lights and visibility
Note
● To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
● To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight washers will be activated every three cycles.
Rear vision mirrors
Interior rear vision mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rear vision mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the rear vision
mirror should be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-
dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vision mirror*
The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and
off as desired.
Fig. 87 Automatic anti-
dazzle interior rear vision
mirror.
Switching off the anti-dazzle function
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 87. Control lamp
B
goes off.
Switching on the anti-dazzle function
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 87. Control lamp is lit.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green warning lamp lights up in the rear vision mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will
darken automatically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-
dazzle function is cancelled if reverse gear is engaged.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
132 Lights and visibility
Note
● The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects pre-
venting light from reaching the interior rear vision mirror.
● If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob
in the centre console.
Fig. 88 Controls of exte-
rior mirrors
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob
⇒
Fig. 88 to position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exterior mirror so that you
have a good view to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the exterior mirror so that you
have a good view to the rear of the vehicle ⇒
.
Heating the exterior mirrors*
– Turn the knob forwards so that the heated rear view mirrors
warm up and the heated windscreen* in the wiper blade rest
area is activated ⇒ page 127.
– The exterior mirror heating is not activated in temperatures
above approximately +20 °C (+68 °F).
Folding in exterior mirrors*
– Turn the control ⇒ Fig. 88 to position to fold in the exterior
mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
driving through an automatic car wash. This will help prevent
damage.
Folding exterior mirrors with convenience closing*
– The exterior mirror will fold back automatically with conven-
ience closing (with the remote or the key).
– To unfold it again, open the door and use the contact
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position*
– Turn the knob to another position to fold the exterior mirrors
back out ⇒
.
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
133Lights and visibility
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exterior mirror so that you
have a good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior
mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
● Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the
objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these
mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing
lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to estimate distances to vehi-
cles behind you.
● Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror
and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer nee-
ded. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note
● If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be ad-
justed by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
● In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be com-
pletely folded electrically. Do not readjust the rear vision mirror housing by
hand, as this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
● The rear vision mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
described before.
● The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors is not active at speeds over
40 km/h (25 mph).
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
134 Seats and storage
Seats and storage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection of-
fered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat
is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways
to suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat
position is very important for:
● a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
● a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,
● a safe driving ⇒ page 7,
● ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum pro-
tection ⇒ page 19.
WARNING
● If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they
may sustain critical injuries.
● Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your ve-
hicle.
● Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt
belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system ⇒ page 46, Child safety.
● The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to
body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide
you and your passengers with optimum protection.
WARNING (Continued)
● Always keep your feet on the footwell when the vehicle is moving;
never rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This
is also applied to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you
to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident.
If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an in-
correct sitting position.
● It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and dash panel. Failure to respect
the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of
fatal injury. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or
between the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as
great as possible.
● Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary. This also applies to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the
rear seats. Otherwise, your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore,
injury. In addition, while adjusting your seat, you will assume an incor-
rect sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents.
● Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front passen-
ger seat. When installing a child seat, please observe the warnings de-
scribed in ⇒ page 46, Child safety.
135Seats and storage
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Fig. 89 Front view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Fig. 90 Side view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
– Adjust the head restraint so that the top is at the same level as
the top of your head or as close as possible to the same level as
the top of your head, at least at eye level ⇒ Fig. 89 and
⇒ Fig. 90.
Adjusting the head restraints
⇒
page 136
WARNING
● Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
● Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event
of a collision or accident.
● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
● The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height
of the passenger.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
136 Seats and storage
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Fig. 91 Adjusting and re-
moving the head re-
straints
Adjusting height (front seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head re-
straint downwards.
– Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head re-
straint downwards.
– Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its
positions. ⇒ page 14
Angle adjustment (front seats)
– Press the head restraint forward or back to the required posi-
tion.
Removing the head restraint
– Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press the button ⇒ Fig. 91 (arrow).
– Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint into the guides on the backrest.
– Push head restraint down.
– Adjust the head restraint to suit body size ⇒ page 14 and
⇒ page 13.
WARNING
● Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
● Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position, there
is a risk of serious injury.
● After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly
for height to achieve optimal protection.
● Please observe the safety warnings in ⇒ page 135, Correct adjust-
ment of head restraints.
137Seats and storage
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
Fig. 92 Front left seat
controls
The control elements in ⇒ Fig. 92 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
1
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
– Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
– Then release the grip
1
and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
2
Adjusting the seat height*
– Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
3
Adjusting the backrest angle
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
4
Adjusting the lumbar support*
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel to
adjust the lumbar support.
As you make the adjustments, the curvature of the cushioned area of the
lumbar region becomes more or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the nat-
ural curvature of the spine.
WARNING
● Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in
motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat
only when the vehicle is stationary.
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger in case of
a sudden braking or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted to-
wards the rear. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be achieved
only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and
front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further the
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to im-
proper positioning of the belt web!
● Exercise caution when securing the seat height into forwards/back-
wards position. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted with-
out due care and attention.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
138 Seats and storage
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
Fig. 93 Thumb wheel for
the front seat heating
Fig. 94 Front seat heat-
ing with Climatronic
Front seat heating for vehicles without Climatronic
– Turn the appropriate thumb wheel ⇒ Fig. 93 to switch on the
seat heating. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position.
Front seat heating for vehicles with Climatronic
– Press button
A
to switch on the seat heating.
– Press once to set seat heating at maximum level (level 3).
– Press twice to set seat heating at medium level (level 2).
– Press three times to set seat heating at minimum level (level 1).
– When the button is pressed four times, the heating goes off and
the LED goes out (level 0).
The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left
thumb wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
139Seats and storage
Rear seats
Seat adjustment
Fig. 95 For unlocking
the rear seat
Fig. 96 Rear seat back-
rest angle adjustment
The seats may be moved forwards or backwards independently.
The movement can be 1/3 or 2/3 of the seat. There are various
possible positions.
Adjusting reach
– In the seated position, unlock the lever in the direction of the
arrow ⇒ Fig. 95.
– Move the seat cushion forwards or backwards to the desired po-
sition.
Adjusting the backrest angle
– Hold the backrest at the top. Pull the loop on the side of the
seat ⇒ Fig. 96
1
in the direction of the arrow and hold the loop
in this position. Push the backrest to the required position and
release the loop.
WARNING
● Adjust the seat only when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your
seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is moving. This could in-
crease the risk of an accident and therefore, injury.
● Do not push the backrests down when the seat is moved, this is to
avoid damage to the centre console.
● Ensure that the seat, once moved, is fixed in position.
Note
● In order to maintain the maximum luggage compartment space, put the
backrests in position normal, without moving.
● In order to maintain the maximum space without putting the backrests
down, move the seats forward to the desired position.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
140 Seats and storage
Folding the seat backrests down
Fig. 97 Folding or open-
ing the rear seat backr-
ests
Fig. 98 Folding or open-
ing the rear seat backr-
ests
– Pull the loop on the side of the seat ⇒ Fig. 98
1
In this position the backrest is locked. This is the reason why the loop loca-
ted on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to
open the backrest ⇒ Fig. 98.
When folding the backrest forwards, make sure to place the side seat belts
in the trim clip ⇒ Fig. 97 to prevent them from being damaged by becoming
trapped in the backrest lock.
WARNING
● You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position
after the loop is released.
● For safety reasons the locking system loops on the seats may not be
used to secure any items.
Lifting the seat backrests
Fig. 99 Folding or open-
ing the rear seat backrest
– Pull the loop on the side of the seat
⇒
Fig. 99
1
in the direc-
tion of the arrow and lift the seat backrest into position.
141Seats and storage
WARNING
● You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position
after the loop is released.
● For safety reasons the locking system loops on the seats may not be
used to secure any items.
● After locking the seat backrest into position ensure that the seat
belts protrude from the seat.
Storage compartment
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Fig. 100 Passenger side:
storage compartment
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever ⇒ Fig. 100.
WARNING
Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is
in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking
or by an accident.
Front centre armrest with storage compartment
There is a storage compartment in the armrest.
Fig. 101 Front armrest
with storage compart-
ment
– To open the storage compartment, lift the armrest up in the di-
rection of the arrow
⇒
Fig. 101 and then lift the cover.
– To access the CD changer* or the lower storage compartment,
pull on the armrest cover without pressing on the button.
– To close the storage compartment, push the armrest down.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
142 Seats and storage
WARNING
Always keep the storage compartment closed while the vehicle is in mo-
tion to reduce the risk of injury from the armrest during a sudden braking
manoeuvre or in the event of an accident.
Note
The CD changer is located in this compartment.
Storage compartment under the front seats*
There is a storage compartment with a cover under each
front seat.
Fig. 102 Storage com-
partment under the front
seats
The drawer* ⇒ Fig. 102
A
is opened by pushing the button and putting the
cover back.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse
if too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
WARNING
● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
● Do not drive with the drawer cover open. There is an injury risk for
passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an acci-
dent.
Folding table*
Folding trays are fitted to the rear of the front seat backrests.
Fig. 103 Folding tray on
the front left seat
– To open the tray, open it up in the direction of the arrow
⇒
Fig. 103.
143Seats and storage
WARNING
● The folding trays may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in mo-
tion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk of
injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The tray must therefore be
closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could
be spilled. Danger of scalding.
CAUTION
When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might
be spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.
Roof storage compartment*
There are four storage compartments in the roof
Fig. 104 Roof storage
compartments
– Press the button on the cover to open these compartments
⇒ Fig. 104. The cover will then open.
– To close the cover, press it up until it engages.
WARNING
Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is
in motion to reduce the risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre
or in the event of an accident and to prevent any items from being thrown
through the vehicle interior.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
144 Seats and storage
Storage in the luggage compartment*
There is a variable storage compartment* in the luggage
compartment floor.
Fig. 105 Variable lug-
gage compartment floor
storage compartment
Fig. 106 Luggage com-
partment divider
– Lift the luggage compartment floor and fold it back all the way
⇒ Fig. 105.
– Fit the separator
A
⇒ Fig. 106, into the side grooves depend-
ing on the size of the objects to be transported. The on-board
tool kit and the spare wheel are located underneath the lug-
gage compartment.
– Secure objects in the luggage compartment with suitable straps
on the fastening rings.
Note
● The maximum weight capacity of the variable boot floor is 100 kg dis-
tributed evenly over the whole floor.
145Seats and storage
Luggage compartment net*
There is a storage net in the luggage compartment for secur-
ing objects.
Fig. 107 Luggage com-
partment net
– Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage com-
partment to attach the storage net ⇒ Fig. 107.
Note
● Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle
⇒ page 297.
Other storage compartments
Other storage compartments can be found:
● in the centre console,
● in the door trims (front and rear),
● in the side trims of the luggage compartment,
● in the spare wheel recess in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles
with an optional anti-puncture kit*.
The clothes hooks are located on the rear roof handles.
WARNING
● Do not store loose objects on the dash panel. These objects could be
flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is moving
(e.g. while accelerating, braking or cornering) and distract the driver.
Risk of accident.
● Ensure that no objects can fall from the centre console or other stor-
age compartments into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. In
the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the
brake, clutch or accelerator. Risk of accident.
● Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view.
Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti-
cles of clothing. Do not leave any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging
articles of clothing. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, es-
pecially those involving airbag deployment, these objects could injure
the vehicle occupants.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
146 Seats and storage
Front drinks holders
Fig. 108 Front drink
holders
In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
⇒
Fig. 108.
WARNING
● Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could
be spilled. Danger of scalding.
● Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could
cause injury in the case of an accident.
Rear cup holder*/ Armrest*
Fig. 109 Opening the
rear drink holders
Fig. 110 Rear armrest/
drink holder
Opening and closing the armrest*/ drink holder*
– To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow
⇒ Fig. 109
1
.
147Seats and storage
– To close, lift the Drink holder*/ armrest* in the direction of the
arrow ⇒ Fig. 110
2
.
WARNING
Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured
with the net* when travelling with the armrest down ⇒ page 145.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
148 Seats and storage
Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment*
General information
This storage compartment may only be placed in the central
area of the rear seat
Fig. 111 Mobile storage
compartment. Opening
Fig. 112 Mobile storage
compartment. Functions
Opening
– Lift the cover
B
, in area
A
⇒ Fig. 111.
Closing
– Push the cover down, until it clips into place.
Uses of the mobile storage compartment
● The front open glove compartment may be used to store small objects
that will not damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung
around the interior of the vehicle.
● The cup holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.
● The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga-
zines.
● The tables may be used as a support for writing.
To use the table
C
⇒
Fig. 112, it must be removed from its compartment in
the side of the mobile storage compartment and fitted into slot
D
⇒
Fig. 112 on the front section of the mobile storage compartment.
149Seats and storage
The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand slot of the
front of the mobile storage compartment and the table in the left-hand com-
partment is fitted in the right-hand slot.
The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.
WARNING
● The mobile stowage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg.
Do not overload.
● Do not drive when the cover of the mobile storage compartment is
open.
● Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.
● When the vehicle is moving, keep the tables stored inside the mobile
storage compartment with the cover closed, and likewise when they are
not in use
● Never place hot drinks in the cup holders. The drink may spill and
cause burns when the vehicle is moving.
● Do not leave cans in the cup holders when the vehicle is in motion,
there is a danger that the can may be flung around the vehicle and cause
injury.
● Make sure that the mounting plate is correctly clipped onto the cush-
ion frame.
● When the plate is not in use, store inside the storage compartment.
● When the mobile storage compartment is not in use, it should always
be fastened by the storage net in the luggage compartment.
Note
● Check that the mobile storage compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it
forwards by the front glove compartment and checking that both safety
clips are correctly clipped onto the rings.
Fitting and removal
This storage compartment may only be placed in the central
area of the rear seat
Fig. 113 Mobile storage
compartment. Installa-
tion
Fig. 114 Mobile storage
compartment mounting
plate
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
150 Seats and storage
Fitting mobile storage compartment
– Fold down the small section of the rear seat backrest, in order
to access the large section of the backrest.
– Fit the mobile storage compartment mounting plate
H
⇒ Fig. 114 from the inside of the vehicle, through the rear part
of the seat. It should be fitted between the backrest and the
seat, in the central seat area.
– Push the plate until it clips the cushion frame. The rings of the
mobile storage compartment mounting plate appear at the front
of the seat.
– If it is difficult to make the plate clip, tilt the rear backrest of the
large section forwards slightly and then lean the backrest back-
wards to make the fitting of the mobile storage compartment
onto the mounting plate easier.
– Place the mobile storage compartment onto the foam of the
central seat.
– Set both mounting pieces together
E
⇒ Fig. 113, with both
mounting rings
G
⇒ Fig. 114 and press hard until both the
clips completely connect with the rings.
Removing mobile storage compartment
– Pull each of the buttons ⇒ Fig. 113
F
on the clips (red buttons)
forwards, until they snap out of place.
– Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile storage com-
partment mounting plate.
Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and power
sockets
Ashtray*
Fig. 115 Ashtray located
in the front drink holder
Opening and closing the ashtray
– To open the ashtray, lift the cover ⇒ Fig. 115.
– To close, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
– Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ash-
tray and cause a fire.
151Seats and storage
Cigarette lighter*
Fig. 116 The cigarette
lighter is located in the
power socket on the front
of the centre console
– Press on the cigarette lighter ⇒ Fig. 116 to activate it ⇒
.
– Wait for the lighter to spring out.
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glow-
ing coil.
WARNING
● Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or
start a fire.
● Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or negligence when using
the cigarette lighter can cause burns and serious injuries.
● The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is
running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone inside the ve-
hicle.
Power sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Fig. 117 Power socket,
centre console, front
Fig. 118 Altea XL/Free-
track Model: power sock-
et in luggage compart-
ment
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
152 Seats and storage
Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt power socket in the
front centre console ⇒ Fig. 117 and in the luggage compartment*. The ap-
pliances connected to each power point must not exceed a power rating of
120 Watt.
WARNING
The power sockets and the connected accessories will only operate when
the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the
sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a
fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children alone inside the vehi-
cle.
Note
● The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a
battery discharge.
● Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions in
⇒ page 226.
Auxiliary audio input (AUX-IN)*
Fig. 119 Auxiliary audio
connection
– Lift the AUX cover ⇒ Fig. 119.
– Insert the plug as far as possible (see Radio manual).
153Seats and storage
AUX RSE connection*
Fig. 120 AUX RSE con-
nection
This connector may be used as an audio input (red and white connectors) or
audio and video connector (red, white and yellow connectors). For more de-
tails about the use of this audio and video source, see the RSE manual.
MEDIA-IN* connector
Fig. 121 Connection in
central armrest compart-
ment
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
154 Seats and storage
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire
extinguisher
Warning triangle* and first-aid kit*
Fig. 122 ALTEA: Warning
triangle storage under
the rear cover
The warning triangle* can be stowed under the rear shelf in a storage com-
partment
⇒
Fig. 122 or in the storage compartment located on the floor
storage compartment, under the carpet, depending on the version.
The first aid kit may be located in the storage compartment under the carpet
in the luggage compartment floor, or in the storage compartment in the lug-
gage compartment side lining, depending on the version.
Note
● The warning triangle and the first aid kit do not belong to the standard
vehicle equipment.
● The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.
● Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. After it has
expired you should purchase a new one.
● Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-
tions in ⇒ page 226.
Fire extinguisher*
The fire extinguisher* can be attached to the luggage compartment carpet
with Velcro.
Note
● The fire extinguisher does not belong to the standard vehicle equip-
ment.
● The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements.
● Make sure the fire extinguisher works. They should therefore be
checked. The sticker on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the next date
for checking.
● Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-
tions in ⇒ page 226.
Luggage compartment
Storing objects
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
155Seats and storage
– Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
– Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable
straps on the fastening rings.
WARNING
● Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious
injuries.
● Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and
change the way the vehicle handles.
● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the passen-
ger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
● Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with
suitable straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
● When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a
change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle han-
dling.
● Please observe information on safe driving ⇒ page 7, Safe driving.
CAUTION
Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating ele-
ment in the rear window and cause damage.
Note
The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered
as this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
Applies to the model: ALTEA
Rear shelf
Fig. 123 Rear shelf
Fig. 124 Removing stor-
age compartment
Removing the shelf
– Unhook the loops ⇒ Fig. 123
B
from housings
A
.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
156 Seats and storage
– Extract the shelf from its slot, in its rest position and pull out-
wards. The storage compartment should remain closed.
To remove the storage compartment
– Pull outwards until the compartment is freed from the pivot
point ⇒ Fig. 124.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf, because they will
endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
CAUTION
● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
● An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is
not correctly seated and it may be bent or damaged.
● If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the tray.
Note
● Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compart-
ment cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
● If the vehicle is fitted with a storage compartment*, it should only be
used to store the emergency triangles* and light objects.
Applies to the model: ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK
Retractable rear shelf
Fig. 125 Using the rear
shelf
Fig. 126 Removing the
rear shelf
Using the rear shelf
– Use the handle
A
to pull the shelf back until you hear a “click”
⇒ Fig. 125.
157Seats and storage
– Press the area marked “PRESS”, and the cover is retrieved auto-
matically.
To remove the rear shelf
– Press the side pin in the direction of the arrow, lift the cover and
remove it ⇒ Fig. 126.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf, because they will
endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
CAUTION
● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
● An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is
not correctly seated and it may be bent or damaged.
● If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the tray.
Note
● Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compart-
ment cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
Applies to the model: ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK
Partition net*
The net partition prevents loose objects in the luggage com-
partment from being thrown forward into the passenger
compartment (e.g. under sudden braking).
Fig. 127 Partition net
Fig. 128 Fastening rings
for the separation net
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
158 Seats and storage
– Pull the net from underneath between the backrest and the fold-
ing tray and fit it to the slots in the roof, first the right then the
left ⇒ Fig. 127.
– Hook the belts into the front fastening rings to tense the net
⇒ Fig. 128.
Roof rack*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
● For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories supplied by SEAT
Official Services are recommended.
● It is essential that you follow the assembly instructions included with
the bars exactly, being especially careful to position the luggage compart-
ment cover bars on the special housings, you must also respect their posi-
tion according to the direction of travel indicated in the assembly manual.
Not following these instructions may cause marks on the bodywork and the
longitudinal bars.
● Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts
and check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts
and check them at regular intervals.
● Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted
for each roof rack system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly
along the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the en-
tire roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor
should the total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the Technical Data
section.
● When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the
normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an in-
creased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
● For those vehicles fitted with a sliding/tilting sunroof*, ensure that it
does not interfere with the load on the roof rack system when opened.
159Air conditioning
Air conditioning
Heating
Operating instructions
Fig. 129 Heating controls on the dash panel
– Use the knobs ⇒ Fig. 129
1
and
4
and control
5
to set the
temperature, air distribution and blower speed.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button
2
or
3
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperature
With the regulator
1
the heating level is determined. The required temper-
ature inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Heated rear window
This function
2
will be switched off automatically approximately 20 mi-
nutes after being switched on. It can also be switched off beforehand by
pushing the button
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode
3
prevents strong odours in the outside air from en-
tering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic ⇒
.
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the vehicle rather than
the air from outside.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
160 Air conditioning
Air distribution
Control
4
for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
– Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is
on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen
mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons,
the air recirculation mode should not be connected.
– Air distribution to the upper body
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control
5
. The air flow
should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
● For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa-
tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise your-
self with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, in-
cluding the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
● In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehi-
cle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched
off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a
long time (risk of accident).
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 169.
161Air conditioning
Climatic*
Controls
Fig. 130 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
The Climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the blower is switched on.
– Use the knobs ⇒ Fig. 130
1
and
5
and control
6
to set the
temperature, air distribution and blower speed.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button
2
,
3
or
4
. When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector ⇒ page 162
AC
button – Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off
⇒ page 162
button – Heated rear window The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. It can also be
switched off beforehand by pushing the button.
1
2
3
Button
– Air recirculation mode ⇒ page 163
Air distribution control ⇒ page 162
Blower switch. There are four speed settings for the air flow. The air
flow should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 169.
4
5
6
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
162 Air conditioning
Heating and cooling the interior
Fig. 131 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
Interior heating
– Turn the temperature selector ⇒ Fig. 131
1
clockwise to select
the required temperature.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
– Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration de-
sired:
(towards the windscreen),
(towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and
(towards the windscreen and
footwell areas).
Interior cooling
– Switch on the air conditioner using the button ⇒ Fig. 130
AC
.
– Turn the temperature selector anticlockwise until the desired
cooling output is reached.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
– Use the air distribution regulator to guide the airflow in the re-
quired direction
(to the windscreen),
(to the upper body),
(to the footwell) and
(to the windscreen and to the foot-
well).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows
when the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
163Air conditioning
● The engine is not running.
● The blower is switched off.
● The outside temperature is lower than approximately +3 °C (+37 °F).
● The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
● The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a speci-
alised workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outside.
Fig. 132 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
Air recirculation mode ⇒ Fig. 132
prevents strong odours in the outside
air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a
tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the vehicle rather than
the cold air from outside.
With high outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the vehicle
rather than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be connec-
ted.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
164 Air conditioning
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode
switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
2C-Climatronic*
Controls
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioner settings for the left and right.
Fig. 133 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
The air conditioner controls the temperature when the engine is
running and the blower is switched on.
– Turn the temperature control knobs ⇒ Fig. 133 to adjust the
temperature on the left hand side or the right hand side respec-
tively.
165Air conditioning
– The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the
radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.
Press the button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of
the vehicle interior.
Button
– defrost function for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen. The air recirculation
mode, if switched on, will be switched off as soon as the defrost func-
tion is switched on. At temperatures over +3 °C (+37 °F), the air condi-
tioning system will be switched on automatically in order to dehumidify
the air. The button is lit in yellow and the symbol appears on the radio
or navigator display.
button – Upward air distribution
button – Central air distribution
button – Downward air distribution
button – Manual air recirculation mode
button – Heated rear window The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and
the symbol appears in the display.
AUTO
button – Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution
control ⇒ page 166
SYNC
button – Dual zone synchroniser
OFF
button – Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off ⇒ page 167
Blower control ⇒ page 167
AC
button – Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system
on
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
166 Air conditioning
Viewing Climatronic information
Information about the Climatronic system can be displayed
on the radio or radio and navigation screen mounted at fac-
tory.
Fig. 134 Navigation dis-
play with information
about the Climatronic
Fig. 135 Radio display
with information about
Climatronic
The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has
been activated.
In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory
briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.
The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the
same as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature
is attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right
sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
– Press the
AUTO
⇒ Fig. 133 button. “AUTO High” is shown on the
radio display (high fan speed).
– Press the
AUTO
button again ⇒ Fig. 133. “AUTO Low” is shown
on the radio display (low fan speed).
Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:
A pleasant temperature is quickly reached in automatic mode at a tempera-
ture of +22 °C (+72 °F). Therefore, we recommend you not to change this ad-
justment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or particular cir-
cumstances. It is possible to select interior temperatures from +18 °C
(+64 °F) to +26 °C (+80 °F). These are approximate temperatures and the ac-
tual temperature may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient
conditions.
167Air conditioning
Climatronic maintains a constant temperature. The temperature of the air
supplied to the interior, the blower speed and the air distribution are regu-
lated automatically. The system also considers the sunlight radiation, so
there is no need for manual readjustment. Therefore, automatic mode al-
most always provides the best comfort for the vehicle occupants throughout
the year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the
buttons for the air distribution, air flow or
or the air recirculation button
. The temperature will continue to be regulated within the parameters
manually selected by the user.
Note
There are two automatic modes:
● Automatic mode LO: This calculates the air flow for two people.
● Automatic mode HI: This calculates the air flow for more than two peo-
ple.
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.
Fig. 136 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
168 Air conditioning
Switching on manual mode
– To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons ⇒ Fig. 136
1
to
5
or press the air flow control
10
. The selected function is
shown on the radio or navigator display.
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector. It
is possible to select interior temperatures from +18 °C (+64 °F) to +26 °C
(+80 °F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature
may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If you select temperatures below +18 °C (+64 °F) the indication LO will ap-
pear on the screen. In this setting the system runs at maximum cooling out-
put and the temperature is not regulated.
If you select temperatures above +26 °C (+80 °F) the indication HI will ap-
pear on the screen. In this setting the system runs at maximum heating out-
put and the temperature is not regulated.
Blower
The air flow may be adjusted freely using the control
10
. Always have the
blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into
the vehicle. Pushing the button to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic
off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons
,
and
. It is also
possible to open and close some of the air vents separately.
Switching the air conditioning on and off
When the
AC
button is on (LED lit), the air conditioning system is on.
When the
AC
button is off (LED off), the air conditioning system is off.
When the
AC
button is off, the air conditioning system is switched off to
save fuel. The temperature continues to self-regulate. The set temperature
can then only be reached if it is higher than the outside temperature.
Driver and passenger temperature control
The
SYNC
button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate
zones.
When the
SYNC
button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
personalised. For example: driver side temperature +22 °C (+72 °F) and pas-
senger side temperature +24 °C (+75 °F).
When the
SYNC
button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
synchronised. For example: driver side temperature +22 °C (+72 °F) and
passenger side temperature +22 °C (+72 °F).
If the
SYNC
button is on and the passenger side temperature is changed,
the function is automatically deactivated.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from coming from the outside.
– Press the button
⇒ Fig. 136
2
to switch air recirculation
mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol appears
in the display .
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from enter-
ing the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in a
traffic jam.
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the vehicle rather than
the air from outside.
169Air conditioning
With high outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the vehicle
rather than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be connec-
ted.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode
switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
General notes
Pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and active carbon filter)
serves as a barrier against impurities in the outside air, including dust and
pollen.
For the air conditioner to work with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter
must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Plan.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas reaching very
high pollution levels, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently
than stated in the Service Schedule.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows
when the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
● The engine is not running.
● The
AC
button is disconnected.
● The outside temperature is lower than approximately +3 °C (+37 °F).
● The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
● The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a speci-
alised workshop.
CAUTION
● If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch it off with but-
ton
AC
to prevent further damage and have it checked by a specialised
workshop.
● Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special
tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop.
Note
● If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa-
tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a pud-
dle underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need
to suspect a leak.
● Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the
windows from misting over.
● The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted
by slots designed for this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these slots with
items of clothing or other objects.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
170 Air conditioning
● The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature inside the vehi-
cle is excessive because of the sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by
opening the windows for a short time.
● Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into
the air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a
permanent unpleasant odour.
● It is advisable to connect the air conditioning at least once a month, to
lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consulted to check the
system.
171Driving
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely ad-
justed to suit the driver.
Fig. 137 Adjusting the
steering wheel position
Fig. 138 Proper sitting
position for driver
– Adjust the driver seat to the correct position.
– Push the lever under the steering column ⇒ Fig. 137 down ⇒
.
– Adjust the steering wheel until the correct position is set
⇒ Fig. 138.
– Then push the lever up again firmly ⇒
.
WARNING
● Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an in-
correct seating position can result in serious injury.
● To avoid accidents, the steering column should be adjusted only
when the vehicle is stationary.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
172 Driving
WARNING (Continued)
● Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of
at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest ⇒ Fig. 138. If
you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you.
Risk of fatal injury.
● If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the mini-
mum distance of 25 cm, contact a Technical Service. The Technical Serv-
ice will help you to decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face,
the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident.
Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
● When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold
the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner
(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In
such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the
arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
The ESC helps make driving safer in extreme driving condi-
tions.
Fig. 139 Detailed view of
the centre console: ESC
switch.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) includes the electronic differential lock
(EDL), the traction control system (ASR), the brake assist system (BAS) and
the trailer stabilisation programme (TSP). The ESC works together with the
ABS. Both control lamps will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are faulty.
The ESC system is started automatically when the engine is started.
The ESC system is always active and cannot be switched off. The ESC switch
only switches the ASR off.
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin is desirable.
For example:
173Driving
● When driving with snow chains.
● When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.
● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it backwards and forwards.
Press the button to switch the ASR back on when you no longer need wheel
spin.
WARNING
● Do not forget that the Electronic stability control (ESC) cannot defy
the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery
and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
● Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ESC should not
encourage you to run any risks.
● Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESC in
⇒ page 196, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition key
Fig. 140 Ignition key po-
sitions
Ignition switched off, steering lock
0
In this position
⇒
Fig. 140 the ignition and the engine are OFF and the steer-
ing may get locked.
For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering
wheel until it locks with an audible sound. You should always lock the steer-
ing wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle theft
⇒
.
Switching the ignition or the glow plug system on
1
Turn the ignition key to this position and release it. If the key cannot be
turned or it is difficult to turn from position
0
to position
1
, move the
steering wheel from one side to the other until it is released.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
174 Driving
Starting
2
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to
position
0
. The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
● The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle
comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately
blocked- Risk of accident!
● Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disa-
bled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the
engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse-
quently resulting in an accident.
● Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical
system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position
2
).
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons
from driving the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser au-
tomatically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The electronic immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as
you pull the key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with its correct
code.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key
with its correct code.
– Move the gearbox lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal thoroughly and hold it in this position for the start-
er to turn the engine on.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting ⇒ page 173 position.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the start-
er motor must not run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to slightly press down the ac-
celerator.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few sec-
onds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
175Driving
If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after 10 sec-
onds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start, the
fuel pump fuse should be checked ⇒ page 272, Fuses.
WARNING
● Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The ex-
haust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poi-
sonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also result in death.
● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
● Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
CAUTION
● When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving
at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
● Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and fol-
low the instructions in ⇒ page 287, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle station-
ary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach oper-
ating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key
with its correct code.
– Move the gearbox lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal thoroughly and hold it in this position for the start-
er to turn the engine on.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting position.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ Fig. 140
1
. The warning
lamp will light for engine pre-heating.
– When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition key to position
2
to
start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the start-
er motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few sec-
onds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see the ⇒ page 287.
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary discharging of the battery, do not use any other major
electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp ⇒ page 82 goes
out.
Starting the diesel engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. This is because
the fuel system must eliminate air first.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
176 Driving
WARNING
● Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The ex-
haust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poi-
sonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also result in death.
● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
● Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
CAUTION
● When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving
at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
● Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and fol-
low the instructions in ⇒ page 287, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle station-
ary. You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the en-
gine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
– Stop the vehicle.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ Fig. 140
0
.
After switching the engine off, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 mi-
nutes. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant
temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine compart-
ment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar radiation.
WARNING
● Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is completely stationary.
● The brake servo works only when the engine is running. With the en-
gine switched off, more strength is needed to brake. As normal brake op-
eration cannot be performed, risk of accidents and serious injury may ex-
ist.
● The steering lock can be immediately blocked once the key is re-
moved from the ignition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
CAUTION
When the engine has been running under a heavy load for a long period,
heat can accumulate in the engine compartment and cause engine damage.
For this reason, you should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you
switch it off.
177Driving
Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL
Driving with LPG*
Fig. 141 Centre console:
gas system control
switch.
Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine able to run on either LPG or petrol.
The LPG tank
⇒
page 230, Refuelling with LPG is in the spare wheel well
⇒
.
Connecting LPG operating mode
● Press button
GAS
.
After checking the system, the engine automatically switches from petrol to
LPG provided the following conditions are met:
● There is enough LPG in the tank.
● The engine coolant has reached the necessary temperature for LPG oper-
ation.
● The outside temperature is suitable for LPG to work.
● The engine speed is always above 1200 rpm.
● The LPG system check has been completed and the established waiting
time has elapsed (this operation may take several minutes).
● No fault was detected during the system check.
The green control lamp will light up on the instrument panel.
Connecting petrol operating mode
● Press button
GAS
.
The green control lamp will go out on the LPG level indicator.
The petrol operating mode connects automatically when the engine is star-
ted or when any of the LPG operating mode conditions are met. As soon as
the necessary conditions are met again, the LPG operating mode is connec-
ted again.
LPG system fault
Message in the instrument cluster
display
How to proceed
Error: LPG Visit the workshop!
Have the system checked immedi-
ately by a specialised workshop.
Gas operating mode currently impos-
sible See the manual!
Check that all the conditions for LPG
operating mode are met
⇒ page 177. If so, have the system
checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
Petrol operating mode currently im-
possible. See the manual!
Have the system checked immedi-
ately by a specialised workshop.
LPG quality and consumption
Quality requirements for LPG are regulated for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and
permit the use of LPG throughout Europe without any problems.
LPG is a mixture of propane and butane.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
178 Driving
A difference is drawn between winter gas and summer gas. Winter gas has a
higher proportion of propane gas. As a result, the driving range of winter
gas may be lower (due to increased consumption) than that of summer gas.
The vehicle's engine management adapts automatically to the LPG used.
Therefore, both types of LPG can be mixed in the tank, without the need for
comprehensive draining before applying a different quality LPG.
LPG and safety
If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a leak in the LPG system. ⇒
● Stop the vehicle immediately.
● Switch the ignition off.
● Open the doors to appropriately ventilate the vehicle.
● Extinguish cigarettes immediately.
● Move away from the vehicle or switch off objects that may cause sparks
or a fire.
● If you continue to smell gas, do not continue driving!
● Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault repaired.
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause se-
vere burns and other injury.
● Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
● When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechani-
cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
WARNING
Failure to act when you can smell gas in the vehicle or when refuelling
can cause serious injuries.
● Carry out the necessary operations.
● Leave the danger zone.
● If necessary, warn the emergency services.
Note
● The LPG system must be subject to regular inspections at a specialised
workshop in accordance with the Maintenance Plan.
● The engine is always started with petrol, even when LPG was being used
when it was switched off. For this reason the tank should never be drained
of petrol completely.
● If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside tem-
perature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on
LPG. Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
● If while you were driving the system switched automatically to petrol op-
erating mode because the LPG tank was almost empty, the next few times
the engine starts up, and according to the outside temperature and and
driving style, it may switch briefly to LPG operating mode to use up what is
left in the tank.
● When the system switches automatically to petrol operating mode be-
cause the LPG tank is almost empty, you can revert to gas operating mode
by pressing the button ⇒ Fig. 141
GAS
while driving slowly and with low ac-
celeration. This procedure can be repeated several times while driving with
precaution until all the LPG left in the tank has been used up.
● Vehicles that can display information or warning messages on the dash-
board may show information related to LPG.
● The notification LPG mode not possible may be displayed.
179Driving
Start-Stop function*
Description and operation
The Start-Stop function stops the engine when the vehicle is stop-
ped and starts it automatically when required.
– When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neutral and release the
clutch pedal. The engine will stop.
– When the clutch pedal is pressed, the engine starts again.
– The instrument panel display shows information about the sta-
tus of the Start-Stop function ⇒ Fig. 143.
Start-Stop function conditions
● The driver seat belt must be buckled.
● The bonnet must be closed.
● The engine must be at operating temperature.
● The steering wheel must not be turned more than 270°.
● The vehicle must not be on a steep gradient.
● The vehicle must not be in reverse.
● A trailer must not be connected.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment must be within the com-
fort limits (button
AC
11
⇒ Fig. 136 should be selected).
● The windscreen de-mist function must be off.
● If not, it requires an increase in airflow
10
⇒ Fig. 136 for more than three
presses.
● The temperature must not be set to HI or LO.
● The driver door must be closed.
● The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel
engines.
● The battery charge must not be low for the next start.
● The battery temperature must be between -1 °C (+30 °F) and +55 °C
(+131 °F).
● The Parking aid system (Park Assist*) must not be activated.
Start-Stop function interruption
In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and
the engine will automatically start:
● The vehicle starts moving.
● The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.
● The battery has been discharged excessively.
● The Start-Stop System is manually deactivated.
● The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment exceeds the comfort
limits (button
AC
11
⇒ Fig. 136 should be selected).
● If in an increase in airflow
10
⇒ Fig. 136 is required for more than three
presses.
● Temperature setting HI or LO is selected.
● The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.
● The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.
● If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfil-
led.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to move with the engine off for any reason. You
could lose control of your vehicle. This could cause an accident and seri-
ous injury.
● Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. That is
why it is much more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
● Turn off the Start-Stop system when driving through water (fording
streams, etc.).
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
180 Driving
Note
● For vehicles with the Start-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when
the engine is started, the clutch must be pressed.
● When the conditions for the Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the in-
strument panel displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.
● If the steering wheel is turned more than 270°, Stop will not function;
however, the angle of steering wheel turn does not affect starting the vehi-
cle.
Activating and deactivating the Start-Stop function
Fig. 142 The Start-Stop
function button.
Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is au-
tomatically switched on.
Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function
– Press the
A
⇒ Fig. 142 located in the centre console. When the
Start-Stop function is deactivated, the pushbutton indicator
lights.
– If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts im-
mediately.
Switching the Start-Stop function on manually
– Press the
A
⇒ Fig. 142 located in the centre console. The indi-
cator on the button will go out.
Driver messages
Fig. 143 Display on the
instrument panel during
Start-Stop function oper-
ation.
When the engine is turned off by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed
on the instrument panel.
181Driving
Note
There are different versions of the dash panel; the display of indications on
the screen may differ.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
182 Driving
Manual gearbox
Driving with a manual gearbox
Fig. 144 Detailed view of
the centre console: gear
shift pattern of a 5-speed
manual gearbox
Fig. 145 Detailed view of
the centre console: gear
shift pattern of a 6-speed
manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gear
– The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press
the clutch down thoroughly.
– Place the gearbox lever into neutral and push the lever down-
wards.
– Slide the gearbox lever to the left, and then into the reverse po-
sition shown on the lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse gear is selected and the igni-
tion is on.
WARNING
● When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as
a gear is engaged and the clutch released.
● Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of
accident.
Note
● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure of
your hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
● When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to
avoid unnecessary wear and damage.
● Do not hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on hills. This causes premature
wear and damage to the clutch.
● Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; although the pressure may
seem insignificant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use
the foot rest when you do not need to change gear.
183Driving
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox*
Selector lever positions
Fig. 146 Centre console:
Selector lever for auto-
matic gearbox / DSG au-
tomatic gearbox
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
Parking position (lever locked).
Reverse position.
Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral po-
sition for manual gearboxes).
Drive position (economic driving programme).
Sports driving position.
Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of
a manual gearbox).
P
R
N
D
S
+/-
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox has three
programmes.
Fig. 147 Programme se-
lection
Selecting the economy programme
– This programme selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain
in a lower gear.
– Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards
– Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. This position is
shared by all programmes for reversing.
Selecting the sport programme
– Move the lever to position S.
If you select the sport programme, S, the programme is designed for a
sports mode, that is, a programme which changes up at higher engine
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
184 Driving
speeds to use the full power of the engine. This programme is not recom-
mended for use on the motorway or in the city.
Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)
This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.
This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the steer-
ing wheel controls when this option is fitted ⇒ page 186.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Fig. 148 Deactivating
the lock
Releasing the selector lever lock
– Start the vehicle.
– Press and release the brake pedal, at the same time press the
button on the selector lever.
Level lock can only be engaged with the vehicle stationary at a speed of less
than 5 km/h (3 mph). It is automatically switched off at higher speeds in
position N.
For rapid changes of position (e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
lever remains in the position N more than one second then it is locked. With
the automatic lock, the lever is prevented passing from P and N to any other
gear without first pressing the brake pedal.
The selector lever must be put in the position P in order to remove the key.
Driving with automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox*
The drive and reverse gears are automatically engaged.
Fig. 149 Driving
Driving
– Press and hold the foot brake.
– Press the button on the selector lever knob (on the left)
⇒ Fig. 149.
185Driving
– Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
– Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to en-
gage, a light jerk will be felt.
– Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
– Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for ex-
ample at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be
put into the positions P or N for this.
– Do not press the accelerator.
Parking
– Press the brake pedal and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to
the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
– Move the selector lever to position D and press to the right to
put the lever into tiptronic mode.
– Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Hill stop
– Hold the vehicle, in all cases, using the brake pedal to prevent
rolling back.
– Do not try to slow the vehicle using another forward gear (en-
gine braking).
Descending gradients
– With the gear engaged, release the brake and accelerate.
The steeper the gradient the lower the gear must be for effective engine
braking. For example, if 3rd gear is used on a very steep gradient, the en-
gine braking is insufficient and vehicle accelerates. So that the engine
speed does not become excessive, the gearbox changes to the next highest
gear. Depress the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the tiptronic
gate to return to 3rd gear.
WARNING
● The driver should never leave the vehicle while the engine is running
or with any gear selected. If for any reason you must leave the vehicle
with the engine running, apply the handbrake and move the selector lev-
er to position P.
● When the engine is running and the positions D, S or R are selected,
it is necessary to hold the vehicle with the brake pedal because the vehi-
cle will creep at a low speed.
● Never accelerate while changing the position of the gear lever (risk of
an accident).
● The gear lever must never be moved into the positions R or P while
moving (risk of an accident).
● Before descending a steep gradient, reduce speed and use the tip-
tronic programme to select a lower gear.
● If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake
to avoid rolling back.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
186 Driving
WARNING (Continued)
● The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even
lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a re-
duction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in
braking distances.
● Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lev-
er in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents,
the use of the tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed
reduced.
CAUTION
● Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause dam-
age. Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in
position.
● If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector
in position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be lubri-
cated.
Changing gear in tiptronic mode*
The tiptronic system allows the driver to select gears man-
ually
Fig. 150 Changing gear
with tiptronic
Fig. 151 Steering wheel
with levers for automatic
gearbox
General information about driving in tiptronic mode
187Driving
Changing gear with the selector lever
– Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter
the tiptronic gate ⇒ Fig. 150.
– Press the gear lever forwards
+
⇒ Fig. 150 to select a higher
gear.
– Press the gear lever back
–
⇒ Fig. 150 to select a lower gear.
Changing gear with the steering wheel levers
– Press the right paddle lever
+
(+OFF) towards the steering
wheel to change up ⇒ Fig. 151.
– Press the left paddle
–
towards the steering wheel to change
down ⇒ Fig. 151.
Using the paddle levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driv-
ing mode regardless of the pre-selected driving mode.
General information about driving in tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox goes
into a higher gear a little before the engine reaches its maximum permitted
revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
will only change down when the engine cannot go over its maximum permit-
ted revolutions.
If tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox is in third gear and selector lever position
D, tiptronic mode will then also be in third gear.
Changing gears in the normal or sport programme using the steering wheel
paddle levers
If the paddle levers ⇒ Fig. 151 are used in the normal or sport programme,
the system switches temporarily to tiptronic mode. To exit tiptronic mode
again, press the right paddle lever
+ OFF
towards the steering wheel for ap-
proximately one second. You will also leave “Tiptronic” mode if the paddle
levers are not moved for a certain time.
Note
● The gearbox controls on the steering wheel can operate with the selector
lever in any position and with the vehicle in motion.
Kick-down feature
This feature allows maximum acceleration.
If you press the accelerator down thoroughly, the gearbox automatically
changes down, depending on speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to
take full advantage of give the vehicle maximum acceleration.
The gearbox does not change gear until the engine reaches the maximum
determined engine speed for the gear.
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road
surfaces. Risk of serious injury.
● Be particularly careful when using the kick-down features on slippery
road surfaces. With a fast acceleration, the vehicle could lose traction
and skid.
● You should use the kick-down feature only when traffic and weather
conditions allow it to be used safely.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
188 Driving
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehi-
cle from accidentally rolling away.
Fig. 152 Handbrake be-
tween the front seats
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly ⇒ Fig. 152.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the di-
rection of the arrow ⇒ Fig. 152 and guide the handbrake lever
down fully ⇒
.
Always apply the handbrake as far as it will go in order to prevent yourself
from driving with the handbrake applied by mistake ⇒
.
The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied
and the ignition switched on. The warning lamp turns off when the hand-
brake is released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) with the handbrake on, the following
message* will appear on the instrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. You
will also hear an audible warning.
WARNING
● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The
braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied
to the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
● If the handbrake is only partially released, this will cause the rear
brakes to overheat, which can impair the function of the brake system
and could lead to an accident. This also causes premature wear on the
rear brake pads.
CAUTION
Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The first gear
should also be selected.
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
– Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
189Driving
– Apply the handbrake.
– Select first gear.
– Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn
the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
– Always take you keys with you when you leave the vehicle ⇒
.
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started
to roll.
● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that
they point towards the kerb.
● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they
point away from the kerb.
● Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and se-
lecting first gear.
WARNING
● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehi-
cle unattended.
● Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is
locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and
could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an
emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle occupants.
● Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle
in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gearbox lever.
● Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or
cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Hill driving assistant*
This function is only included in vehicles with ESC.
The hill driving assistant helps the driver to move off and upwards on a hill
when the vehicle is stationary.
The system maintains brake pressure for approximately two seconds after
the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
lurching backwards when it is started. During these two seconds, the driver
has enough time to release the clutch pedal and accelerate without the ve-
hicle moving and without having to use the handbrake, making start-up
easier, more comfortable and safer.
These are the basic operation conditions:
● being on a ramp or hill/slope,
● closed doors,
● vehicle completely stationary,
● engine running and foot on the brake,
● besides having a gear engaged or being in neutral for manual gear
change and with the selector lever at positions S, D or R in vehicles with au-
tomatic gearbox.
This system is also active in reversing uphill.
WARNING
● If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off
the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain condi-
tions. Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.
● If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake
immediately.
● When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal
down for a few seconds before starting off.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
190 Driving
Note
The Official Service or a specialist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is
equipped with this system.
Parking aid acoustic system*
General notes
Various parking aid systems are available to help you when parking or ma-
noeuvring in tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehi-
cle.
The SEAT Parking System* gives an audible warning if there are any obsta-
cles behind your vehicle.
When you are parking, the SEAT Parking System Plus* warns you acoustical-
ly and optically
1)
about obstacles “in front of” and “behind” the vehicle.
Note
To ensure the acoustic parking aid works properly, the sensors must be kept
clean and free of snow and ice.
SEAT Parking System: Description
The Parking System is an acoustic parking aid.
Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-
cle, you are alerted by audible warnings. The measuring range of the sen-
sors starts at approximately:
Rear
Side 0.60
Centre 1.60
The audible warnings sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away from the obstacle, the
warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about four
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obsta-
cle (it does not affect the permanent audible warning).
The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
You will hear a brief confirmation tone.
WARNING
● The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver
is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
● The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will
not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid ac-
cidents.
● Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full
use of the rear vision mirrors.
1)
Vehicles with a navigation system.
191Driving
CAUTION
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not
give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be de-
tected by the system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note
Please refer to the notes on towing ⇒ page 192.
SEAT Parking System Plus*: Description
The Parking System Plus is an acoustic and optical parking
aid.
Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect
an obstacle, you are alerted by audible and optical warnings. The measur-
ing range of the sensors starts at approximately:
Front
Side 0.90
Centre 1.20
Rear
Side 0.60
Centre 1.60
The audible warnings sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away from the obstacle, the
warning tone will sound continuously. Stop moving immediately!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about four
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obsta-
cle (it does not affect the permanent audible warning).
Activating/Deactivating
Fig. 153 Centre console:
Switch for parking aid
Activate
– Connects the radio navigator
– Press the switch on the centre console ⇒ Fig. 153 or on the
gear indicator. You will hear a brief confirmation tone and the
LED on the switch will light up.
Deactivating
– Drive forward faster than 10 km/h (6 mph), or
– Press the switch or
– Switch the ignition off.
Segments in the optical display
Some colour segments in front and behind and an audible warning enable
the driver to assess the distance with respect to an obstacle. The amber col-
our segments combined with a discontinuous beep indicate the presence of
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
192 Driving
an obstacle. As the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle, the colour of the seg-
ment changes to red and the acoustic signal beeps continuously. When the
penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached
the collision zone. Stop moving immediately! ⇒
.
WARNING
● The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver
is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
● The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will
not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid ac-
cidents.
● Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full
use of the rear vision mirrors.
CAUTION
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not
give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be de-
tected by the system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note
● Please refer to the notes on towing ⇒ page 192.
● There is a slight delay in the picture display.
Towing bracket
In towing mode, the rear parking aid sensors are not enabled when you se-
lect reverse gear or press the switch . This function may not be guaran-
teed on towing brackets that are not factory fitted. This results in the follow-
ing restrictions:
SEAT Parking System*
No warning is given
SEAT Parking System Plus*
There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when
obstacles are detected while driving forward. The optical display changes to
towing mode.
Fault messages
If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the switch *
starts flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has oc-
curred. Please refer the problem to a SEAT Official Service or specialised
workshop.
Note
If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be
indicated by the flashing LED on the switch the next time you switch on
the parking aid.
193Driving
Cruise speed* (Cruise control system)
Description
The CCS is able to maintain the set speed in the range from
approx. 30 km/h (19 mph) to 180 km/h (112 mph).
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the ac-
celerator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible
to drive at constant speed.
● Do not use the cruise control system when driving in dense traffic, on
roads with lots of bends or on roads with poor conditions (with ice, slip-
pery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as this could cause an accident.
● Always switch the cruise control system off after using it in order to
avoid involuntary use.
● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current
road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending
downhill. The vehicle will accelerate due to its own weight. Use the foot
brake to slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Fig. 154 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise con-
trol
Switching on the cruise control system
– Push the switch ⇒ Fig. 154
B
to the left to ON.
Switching off the cruise control system
– Either push the switch
B
to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
off when the vehicle is stationary.
When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the lamp on
the instrument panel is lit.
1)
If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off.
The system will also be deactivated completely when 1st gear is selected.*
1)
Depending on the model version
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
194 Driving
Setting speed*
Fig. 155 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise con-
trol
– Press the lower part SET/- of the rocker switch ⇒ Fig. 155
A
once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held con-
stant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
– Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker switch ⇒ Fig. 155
A
to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
– Press the lower part SET/– ⇒ Fig. 155
A
of the rocker switch to
reduce the speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its
speed for as long as you keep the switch pressed. When you re-
lease the switch, the new speed is stored.
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal,
the system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the
case, however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h (6 mph) higher
than the stored speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be
stored again.
Cruise control is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the brake
pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part of
the rocker switch RES/+ ⇒ Fig. 155
A
.
Switching off cruise control temporarily*
Fig. 156 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise con-
trol
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
195Driving
● if the brake pedal is depressed,
● if the clutch pedal is depressed,
● if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h (112 mph),
● when the ESC or ASR is used.
● when the lever
B
is moved to the position CANCEL without reaching the
OFF position. Once the CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is released
and returns to its initial position.
To resume cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the ve-
hicle speed to less than 180 km/h (112 mph) and press once on the upper
part of the rocker switch RES/+ ⇒ Fig. 156
A
.
Complete system deactivation*
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control
B
⇒ Fig. 156 all
the way to the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is station-
ary, switching off the ignition.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in
one of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and
the ignition turned off.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
196 Intelligent technology
Practical Tips
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It
works only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
● Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do
so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased consid-
erably when the brake servo is not active.
● If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is be-
ing towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
than normal.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*
The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is only included in
vehicles with ESC.
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
This is when the brake assist system comes into action. When pressing the
brake pedal rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emergency. It then very
quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated
more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than
80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times per second to warn
vehicles driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights
will come on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They
switch off automatically when the vehicle starts to move again.
197Intelligent technology
WARNING
● The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep
your distance to the vehicle in front, and when the road surface is slip-
pery or wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake
assist system.
● The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! There-
fore, it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any
risks when driving.
Anti-lock brake and traction control systems
M-ABS (ABS and ASR)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking dur-
ing braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake
pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one
or more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has
intervened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully de-
pressed so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not “pump”.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is re-
tained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
● The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the
extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
● The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted
⇒ page 253.
● If the running gear or brake system is modified, the effectiveness of
the ABS could be severely limited.
Drive wheel traction control system (ASR)
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating.
Description and operation of the traction control system during
acceleration (ASR
On front-wheel drive vehicles, the ASR system intervenes, reducing engine
power and preventing the driven wheels from slipping during acceleration.
The system works in the entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a
failure occurs in the ABS, the ASR will also stop working.
The ASR helps the car to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in
slippery conditions, where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossi-
ble.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
198 Intelligent technology
The ASR automatically switches on when the engine is started. If necessary,
it may be turned on or off by briefly pushing the button on the centre con-
sole.
When the ASR is switched off, the
OFF
warning lamp will light up. The ASR
should normally be left on. Only in exceptional circumstances, when the
slipping of the wheels is required, it will be necessary to have it disconnec-
ted, for example.
● With compact temporary spare wheel.
● When using the snow chains.
● When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
● When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.
The ASR should be switched on again as soon as possible.
WARNING
● Remember that not even the ASR can defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
● Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ASR should not
encourage you to run any risks.
CAUTION
● To ensure that the ASR works correctly, identical tyres should be fitted
on all four wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine,
brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may
affect the operation of the ABS and ASR.
XDS*
Driveshaft differential
When taking a bend, the driveshaft differential mechanism allows the outer
wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel
that is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner
wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque delivered to the
inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the
outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This
causes an overall loss of lateral grip on the front axle, resulting in under-
steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
The XDS system can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and sig-
nals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess
driving torque of that wheel. This means that the driver's desired trajectory
is much more precise,
The XDS system works in combination with the ESC and is always active,
even when the ASR traction control is disconnected.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
General notes
The Electronic Stability Control increases the vehicle's stabil-
ity on the road.
The Electronic Stability Control helps reduce the danger of skidding.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) includes the ABS, EDL, ASR and Steer-
ing manoeuvre recommendation systems.
199Intelligent technology
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by braking the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for exam-
ple, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESC brakes the appropriate wheel au-
tomatically.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
Steering manoeuvre recommendations
This is a complementary safety function included in the ESC. This function
aids the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For exam-
ple, in case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle
will tend to destabilise its trajectory to the right or to the left. In this case,
the ESC recognises the situation and assists the driver with a counter steer-
ing manoeuvre from the power steering.
This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in
critical situations.
The vehicle does not steer itself with this function, the driver has full control
of the vehicle at all times.
WARNING
● Remember that not even the ESC can defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
● Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ESC should not
encourage you to run any risks.
CAUTION
● To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all four wheels must be fitted
with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine,
brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may
affect the operation of the ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking
⇒ page 197.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in
slippery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossi-
ble.
The system will control the revolutions of the driven wheels using the ABS
sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
⇒ page 83.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differen-
ces in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by a
slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the oth-
er driven wheel via the differential.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
200 Intelligent technology
To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL
cuts out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will con-
tinue to function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not in-
formed that the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled
down.
WARNING
● When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and
snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may
start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.
● Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic
situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into tak-
ing any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
CAUTION
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the EDL ⇒ page 226.
Drive wheel traction control system (ASR)
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when
the vehicle is accelerating
⇒
page 197.
All-wheel drive*
On all-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed
to all four wheels
General notes
The all-wheel drive system operates completely automatically. The propul-
sion force is distributed among the four wheels and adapted to the driving
style and the road conditions.
The all-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine
power. This combination gives the vehicle exceptional handling and per-
formance capabilities, both on normal roads and in more difficult condi-
tions, such as snow and ice.
Winter tyres
Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your vehicle will have plenty of traction in win-
ter conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recom-
mend that winter tyres or all-season tyres should be fitted on all four wheels
when winter road conditions are expected, mainly because this will give a
better braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with
all-wheel drive.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling
circumference ⇒ page 258.
201Intelligent technology
WARNING
● Even with all-wheel drive, you should always adjust your speed to
suit the conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into
taking any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
● The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. Ve-
hicle behaviour is no different from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. So
do not be tempted to drive too fast on icy or slippery roads just because
the vehicle still has good acceleration in these conditions. Failure to do
so could result in an accident.
● On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aqua-
plane and lose contact with the road if the vehicle is driven too fast. If
this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed
when aquaplaning begins to warn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive
vehicle. For this reason and for that mentioned above, always choose a
driving speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could re-
sult in an accident.
Brakes
What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km
(250 miles); first they must be “run in”. However, the reduced braking ca-
pacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.
Avoid overloading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive
and the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the vehicle or
driving through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or
in winter by ice) on the discs and brake pads. In this case the brakes should
be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the vehi-
cle is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot
of salt on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs
and pads has to wear off before braking.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build
up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are
not used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is
advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a
moderately high speed ⇒
.
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest
specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-
member that you will have to apply more pressure on the brake pedal and
allow for longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too
low. The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
brake servo works only when the engine is running.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
202 Intelligent technology
WARNING
● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake system only in a suitable
traffic situation. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road
users. Risk of accident.
● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is
stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION
● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is
not necessary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
● Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce
speed and change to a lower gear (or move the gear lever to a lower gear
position if your vehicle has an automatic gearbox). This makes use of en-
gine braking and prolongs the useful life of the brakes. If you still have to
use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the
brakes continuously.
Note
● If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehi-
cle has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
● If you wish to equip the vehicle with accessories such as a front spoiler
or wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Power steering (servotronic*)
Power steering makes it easier to turn the steering wheel
when the engine is running.
Power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the de-
gree of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road
speed.
The power steering will keep on working even if the servotronic* device
fails. The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to dif-
ferent speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly,
this is most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for
instance when parking), as more effort will be required than usual. The fault
should be corrected by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering
wheel requires much more force to turn.
If the steering is held at its turning limit when the vehicle is stationary, this
will place an excessive load on the power steering system. Turning the
steering wheel to its limit places a load on the system, which causes noise.
It will also reduce the idling speed of the engine.
CAUTION
When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for
more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power
steering.
203Intelligent technology
Note
● If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off
(for instance when being towed), the vehicle can still be steered. However,
more effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.
● If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the vehicle to a
specialised workshop as soon as possible.
● The power steering system requires a special hydraulic fluid. The con-
tainer is located in the engine compartment (front left). The correct fluid lev-
el in the reservoir is important for the power steering to function properly.
The hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
204 Driving and the environment
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run in over the first 1,500 km
(1000 miles).
Up to 1000 kilometres (600 miles)
– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.
– Do not accelerate hard.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900 miles)
– Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consump-
tion reduced.
Braking capacity and braking distance
The braking capacity and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The
rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions
under which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you
often drive in town traffic, drive short distances or have a sporty driving
style, we recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads
checked by a Technical Service more frequently than recommended in the
Service Plan.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in
heavy rainfall or even after washing the vehicle, the effect of the brakes is
lessened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter). In this case
the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk
of accidents.
● New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction
during the first 400 km. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. This also ap-
plies when the brake pads have to be changed further on.
● If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have
been salted, braking power may be lower than normal.
205Driving and the environment
WARNING (Continued)
● On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively used, they will overheat.
Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of
transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
● Never let the brakes “drag” by applying light pressure. Continuous
braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will
increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
● Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking
distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, va-
pour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of
the brakes.
● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to
the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories
please observe the relevant instructions ⇒ page 226, Technical modifi-
cations.
● If a brake system circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased
considerably. Contact a specialised workshop immediately and avoid un-
necessary journeys.
Exhaust gas purification system
Catalytic converter*
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter
– Use only unleaded petrol with petrol engines, as lead damages
the catalytic converter.
– Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
– For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine
oil ⇒ page 241, Topping up engine oil .
– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
⇒ page 287.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust gas warning lamp
will light up when any of the described symptoms occur ⇒ page 76. If this
happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the en-
vironment. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Risk of fire!
● Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
dry grass or flammable materials under the vehicle.
● Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the
exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys-
tem. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry because the irregularity of the fuel
supply may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the
exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic
converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends
on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be
solved by changing to another brand of fuel.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
206 Driving and the environment
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
Fig. 157 Vehicle data
sticker on back cover of
the Maintenance Pro-
gramme
Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel particulate filter) if the vehicle data
sticker (back cover of the “Maintenance Programme”) lists the PR code 7GG
or 7MG
⇒
Fig. 157.
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the ex-
haust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If
driving conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multi-
ple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the diesel
engine particulate filter warning lamp will light up. This does not repre-
sent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has not been able to
regenerate automatically and that you must carry out a cleaning cycle, as in-
dicated in
⇒
page 82.
WARNING
● The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high temper-
atures; the vehicle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe does not
come into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of fire.
CAUTION
● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any cir-
cumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the
diesel producer in accordance with standard EN 590 is authorised and will
not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur content may significantly reduce
the useful life of the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical Service will be
able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.
Economical and environmentally friendly
driving
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an eco-
nomical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Some tips on how to help you
reduce pollution while saving money are listed below.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
tion, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
207Driving and the environment
let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of
brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero (dis-
connection due to inertia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible.
We recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2000 rpm. Follow the “recommended gear” indication that ap-
pears on the instrument panel ⇒ page 62.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly
at higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at lev-
el crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after
only 30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart
the engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear
and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up
phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine.
Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey,
you will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
mum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting exhaust gases, the
engine and the exhaust gas filtration systems should reach the optimum
operating temperature.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise until having
driven approximately four kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend
avoiding short trips whenever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If
the tyre pressure is just one bar (14.5 psi / 100 kPa) too low, fuel consump-
tion can increase by as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance,
under-inflation also increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by
up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Given that every kilo of extra weight will increase the fuel consumption, it is
advisable to always check the luggage compartment to make sure that no
unnecessary loads are being transported.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is
no longer needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and 120 km/h
(75 mph) your vehicle will use about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra
wind resistance caused by the roof rack even when it is not in use.
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the
need for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, al-
ways turn off electrical components when you do not need them. Examples
of components that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the
rear window heating or the seat heaters*.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
208 Driving and the environment
Note
● If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended to switch this func-
tion off.
● It is recommended to close the windows when driving at more than
60 km/h (40 mph)
● Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure
can make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch
plate lining, causing a serious fault.
● Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or
hand brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and
you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.
● On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more
suitable for the slope. The fuel consumption will be lower and the brakes
will not suffer.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and manufacture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage recycling
● Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling
● Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
● Increased use of single-grade materials.
● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043,
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
● Use of recycled materials.
● Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not
easily separated.
● Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable
sources.
● Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials.
● Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV
Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities.
● Use of plastic film as protection during vehicle transport.
● Use of solvent-free adhesives.
● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling systems.
● Recycling and energy recovery from residues (RDF).
● Improvement in the quality of waste water.
● Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, en-
thalpy wheels, etc.).
● The use of water-soluble paints
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
209Driving and the environment
● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol
is available for the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Automobile organ-
isations will have information about service station networks selling unlea-
ded fuel.
● In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle model is not sold, and
therefore spare parts are not available or the Technical Services can only
carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparations that you vehicle requires and also about necessary
maintenance and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the head-
light lenses. Further information is available at your Technical Service.
In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the rotation system must previously be
disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised workshop.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
210 Trailer towing
Trailer towing
Instructions to follow
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements
for towing a trailer. If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, consult
⇒ page 212.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available in any Technical Service.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up
to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspond-
ingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar
load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weights and drawbar loads that are given on the data
plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct
figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for
the towing bracket, are given in the vehicle documentation or in ⇒ chap-
ter Technical Data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them mov-
ing.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissible pressure shown on the stick-
er on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres
in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard rear vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you should have addi-
tional exterior mirrors fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on
hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the
rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
211Trailer towing
Note
● Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the ve-
hicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
● Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook
may be stored in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage
compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and caus-
ing injury.
Note
● By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
if it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
this reason, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed
in an unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially
when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slight-
est sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed.
Always brake in due course. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can
be caused by locking of trailer wheels. Select a low gear in due course be-
fore going down a steep downhill. This enables you to use the engine brak-
ing to slow down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and during prolonged slopes, driving in a low
gear and high engine speed, always monitor the coolant temperature gauge
⇒ page 55.
Electronic Stability Control*
The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer in case of skidding or rocking.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
212 Trailer towing
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Fig. 158 Attachment points for towing bracket
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket
A
are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle
and including the maximum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK
B
65 mm (minimum)
C
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
D
357 mm 344 mm
E
569 mm 531 mm
F
875 mm 1044 mm
G
1040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact a Technical Service to check
whether your cooling system needs modification.
● The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting
of a separate control lamp).
● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and a power socket must be connected to the vehicle electri-
cal system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.
● Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop.
● If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is a serious danger
of accident.
● For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the towing bracket.
CAUTION
● If the power socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to
the vehicle electrical system.
213Trailer towing
Note
For the sports model (Altea FR), fitting of a trailer bracket is not recommen-
ded due to the design of the bumpers.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
214 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This
may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in
the event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the envi-
ronment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer
substances such as insect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road
dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materi-
als remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High
temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive
effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have
the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car-care products are available in your Technical Services. Keep the product
instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
● Car-care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be
kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of chil-
dren. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
● Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the pack-
age before using car-care products. Improper use could cause health
problems or damage the vehicle. The use of certain products may pro-
duce noxious vapours; they should be used in well ventilated areas.
● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other
volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and ex-
plosion.
● Before washing your vehicle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch
the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the
ignition.
CAUTION
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage
the paintwork or the windows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with
plenty of water.
For the sake of the environment
● When purchasing products for your vehicle maintenance, select the
ones which are not harmful to the environment.
● The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordina-
ry household waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
215Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car wash tunnel
The vehicle can normally be washed without problem in an
automatic car wash.
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork
wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tunnel, the
brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a vehicle wash, be sure to take the usual precautions
such as closing the windows and sunroof.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator.
After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake
discs and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by
braking several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness.
Risk of accident.
CAUTION
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
– First soften the dirt and rinse it off with water.
– Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge, a
glove or a brush. Use very light pressure.
– Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean water.
– Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
– Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last, using a different
sponge or glove.
– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
– Dry the vehicle surface gently with a chamois leather.
– In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals and their surfaces to
prevent them from freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
seals.
After washing the vehicle
– After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
by braking several times ⇒ page 204, Braking capacity and
braking distance.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
216 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
WARNING
● Wash your vehicle with the ignition switched off.
● Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when
cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of in-
jury.
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident.
CAUTION
● Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle
with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around
the doors, rear lid, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment
To protect environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially pro-
vided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the
sewerage system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is
prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
– Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
– Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows ⇒ page 217.
– Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotating jets”) ⇒
.
– After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. “” Dry the
brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 204.
WARNING
● Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet (“rotating nozzle”). Even at
large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible
damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident.
CAUTION
● Do not use water hotter than +60 °C (+140 °F). This could damage the
vehicle.
● To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
materials such as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This
is also important for bumpers painted in the colour of the bodywork. The
closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
217Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Vehicle paint maintenance
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water does not form small drops
and run off the paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax products are available at your Technical Service.
Regular wax applications help to protects the paintwork from environmental
contaminants. ⇒ page 214. It also protects against minor scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is
advisable to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss can-
not be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased
in your Technical Service.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not con-
tain wax compounds to seal the paint ⇒ page 217, Vehicle paint mainte-
nance.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
● Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or
on plastic parts.
● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved sol-
vent-free plastic cleaning and care products.
CAUTION
● The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle
may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
● Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning windows
– Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol
based glass cleaner.
– Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free
cloth.
Removing snow
– Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mir-
rors.
Removing ice
– Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. The chamois leath-
ers used on painted surfaces are not suitable to clean windows because
they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the windows.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
218 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper,
push it in one direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and
silicone deposits off.
Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Tech-
nical Services. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
blades to judder. Adding a window cleaner that dissolves wax to the wind-
screen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits
are not removed.
CAUTION
● Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
● The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of
the window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating ele-
ments on the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades improve visibility.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Rubber seals maintenance
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The rubber strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain
pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will
not freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning
product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface.
219Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
CAUTION
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
● Never use an abrasive cleaning product on chrome.
● Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheel rims
– Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distan-
ces and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to
the tyres. This may cause an accident.
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 204.
Alloy wheel rims
Every two weeks
– Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
– Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.
Every three months
– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road
salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be im-
paired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used for maintaining the
rims. If the protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying stones, the dam-
aged area should be repaired immediately.
WARNING
● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distan-
ces and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to
the tyres. This may cause an accident.
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 204.
Underbody protection
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical
and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you
to check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and
reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend you to go to your Technical Service to carry out repair work
and additional anti-corrosion work.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
220 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,
catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of
the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehi-
cle is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the ve-
hicle, the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before
and after winter.
Your Technical Services have got the necessary workshop equipment to pro-
vide the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we rec-
ommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine
cleaned. On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams,
joints and components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion
treatment.
WARNING
● When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 235.
● Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the hand-
brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.
● Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
● Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims
without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-
edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.
● Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system may affect braking effec-
tiveness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and
sharp braking.
● Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could
start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.
The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason, en-
gine washing should be carried out only by a specialised workshop or a pet-
rol station.
Vehicle interior maintenance
Introduction
The dye used in many modern garments, for example dark jeans, is not al-
ways sufficiently colour-fast. Seat upholstery (material and leather), espe-
cially when light-coloured, may visibly discolour if the dye comes out of
clothing (even when used correctly). This is not an upholstery defect but in-
dicates that the dye in the item of clothing is not sufficiently colour-fast.
221Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
The longer stains or dirt remain on the vehicle surfaces, especially the fab-
rics covering the padded upholstery, the more difficult it becomes to clean
and maintain them. If stains and dirt are left for a long time, it may be that
they are impossible to remove.
WARNING
Car-care products may be toxic and hazardous. Using unsuitable car-care
products or, using them in the wrong way, may cause accidents, serious
injury, burns or intoxication.
● Keep your car-care products in their original containers.
● Read the instructions.
● Never keep car-care products in empty food containers, bottles or
other similar containers. Other people may confuse them.
● Keep all car-care products out of the reach of children.
● Some products may give off harmful vapours during use. Therefore,
they should be used outdoors in well-ventilated places.
● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail-varnish remover or any
other volatile product for washing, maintenance or cleaning. These are
toxic and highly flammable.
WARNING
Unsuitable maintenance and cleaning of vehicle components may impair
proper operation of safety equipment and cause serious injury.
● Maintain and clean vehicle components according to the manufactur-
er's instructions.
● Only use approved or recommended cleaning products.
CAUTION
● Cleaning products which contain solvents have a corrosive effect and
may damage the material irreparably.
● Stains and dirt containing aggressive substances or solvents attack the
material and may damage it irreparably, even when they are cleaned quick-
ly.
● Dirt and stains should not be allowed to dry and should be cleaned as
quickly as possible.
● In the case of stubborn stains, take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to avoid damage.
Treating your upholstery
Checklist
To treat and maintain your seat upholstery, keep the following in mind ⇒
:
Before entering the vehicle, close any Velcro fasteners that might
snag on the upholstery or trim fabric. Any open Velcro fasteners may
damage the trim or upholstery fabrics.
To prevent damage, avoid direct contact between sharp decorative
objects and the upholstery and trim fabrics. Decorative objects in-
clude zips, rivets and rhinestones on clothing and belts.
From time to time, clean the dust that gathers in the perforations,
folds and seams so that the surfaces of the seats are not damaged
by its abrasive effect.
Make sure clothes are colour-fast to avoid them running and staining
the upholstery. This is especially important if the upholstery is light
in colour.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
222 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
CAUTION
If you ignore this checklist, which is important for maintaining your seat up-
holstery, the fabric may be damaged or stained.
● Consult the checklist and carry out the operations it describes.
Note
SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to treat
any stains on the upholstery caused by the discolouration of clothing.
How to clean the upholstery, trim fabrics and Alcantara
®
Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrically adjustable seats or
seats with airbag components
It is possible that there are important airbag components and electrical con-
nections inside the driver seat, passenger seat and possibly the outer rear
seats. If these seats and seat backrests are damaged, or are cleaned and
are treated incorrectly, or if they get wet, the vehicle electric system may be
destroyed and the airbag system damaged
⇒
.
Electric and heated seats contain components and electrical connections
that may be damaged if the seats are cleaned or incorrectly treated
⇒
.
Similarly, damage might be caused at other points in the vehicle's electric
system.
For this reason, bear the following indications in mind for cleaning:
● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment or cold aerosols.
● Do not use cream detergents or detergent-based solutions for delicate
garments.
● Prevent the fabric from getting wet at all times.
● Only use cleaning products approved by SEAT.
● If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professional cleaning company.
Cleaning the fabric on unheated seats, non-electrically adjustable seats
and seats without airbag components
● Before using any cleaning products, consult and keep in mind the in-
structions of use, indications and warnings on the container.
● Use a vacuum cleaner (with the brush attachment) on the trim and seat
fabrics, the Alcantara
®
upholstery of the seats and the carpet.
● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment or cold aerosols.
● For general cleaning, use a soft sponge or an ordinary lint-free microfi-
bre cloth ⇒
.
● Clean Alcantara
®
surfaces with a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth,
or a standard lint-free microfibre cloth ⇒
.
If the dirt on the trim and upholstery fabrics is only superficial, you can use
a standard foam cleaner.
If the upholstery and trim are very dirty, before cleaning them we recom-
mend you find out about the most suitable cleaning options from a profes-
sional cleaning company. If necessary, the cleaning should be carried out
by a specialised company.
Stain removal
When removing stains, it may be necessary to clean the whole surface and
not just the stain itself. Especially if the surface has been dirtied through
normal use. If you only clean the stained area, that part may then look light-
er than the rest. If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professional cleaning com-
pany.
WARNING
If there is a fault in the airbag system, it is likely that the airbag will not
deploy correctly, not deploy at all, or do so unexpectedly, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries.
● Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.
223Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
CAUTION
If the upholstery on electrically operated seats or seats with airbag compo-
nents gets soaked, the vehicle's electric system and certain other compo-
nents may be damaged.
● If the seat gets soaked, take the vehicle immediately to a specialised
workshop to be dried and for the system components to be inspected.
● Do not use steam cleaning equipment as the dirt becomes more encrus-
ted and fixed in the material.
● High-pressure cleaning equipment and cold aerosols may damage the
upholstery.
CAUTION
● Brushes should only be used to clean the carpet and floor mats! Other
fabrics may be damaged if cleaned with a brush.
● If cream detergents or detergents for delicate garments are applied with
a damp cloth or sponge, they may, for example, leave rings when dry be-
cause of the surfactant components they contain. Generally, such rings are
very difficult or almost impossible to remove.
CAUTION
● Do not let water soak into Alcantara
®
under any circumstances.
● Do not use leather cleaning products, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
stain removers or similar products on Alcantara
®
.
● Never use brushes for cleaning damp material as they could damage the
surface.
Cleaning and maintenance of natural leather upholstery
Consult a professional cleaning workshop if you have any doubts on clean-
ing and maintaining the leather equipment in your vehicle.
Maintenance and treatment
Nappa natural leather is delicate because it has no additional protective
layer.
● After cleaning, regularly apply a conditioner with sun-screen and im-
pregnating action. These products nourish the leather, soften it and make it
more breathable, as well as re-hydrating it. They also provide it with a pro-
tective film.
● Clean the leather every two or three months and remove stains as they
appear.
● Treat the leather regularly (about twice a year) with a suitable mainte-
nance product.
● Apply as few cleaning and maintenance products as possible, always
using a dry, lint-free cotton or woollen cloth. Do not apply cleaning and
maintenance products directly to the leather.
● Remove recent ball-point pen and ink stains, lipstick, shoe cream and
similar stains as soon as possible.
● Maintain the colour of the leather. To do this, use a special cream espe-
cially coloured for leather to achieve the same overall colour, if necessary.
● Afterwards, go over it with a soft cloth.
Cleaning the vehicle
SEAT recommends using a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth for general
cleaning purposes.
Generally, the leather should never be soaked at any point, nor should wa-
ter penetrate the seams.
Before cleaning the leather upholstery, bear in mind the following recom-
mendations ⇒ page 222, Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrical-
ly adjustable seats or seats with airbag components.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
224 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
CAUTION
● On no account use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or
similar materials on leather.
● If the stain remains on the leather for long, it will soak in and be impos-
sible to remove.
● In the event of spilt liquids, dry immediately with an absorbent cloth to
prevent the liquid penetrating through the leather or seams.
● If the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather
should be protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading.
Note
The leather will usually change colour slightly with use.
Cleaning synthetic leather upholstery
Before cleaning the synthetic leather upholstery, bear in mind the following
recommendations
⇒
page 222, Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and
electrically adjustable seats or seats with airbag components
Only use water and neutral cleaning products to clean synthetic leather up-
holstery.
CAUTION
Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain removers or similar prod-
ucts on synthetic leather. These will stiffen the material, causing it to crack
prematurely.
Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning
– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special sol-
vent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleaners
containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the
airbag triggered, plastic parts could become detached and cause inju-
ries.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Wooden trim cleaning*
– Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
225Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Cleaning the radio and climate controls
To clean the radio and/or climate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more
resistant dirt, a neutral soap solution may be used.
Seat belt cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly.
Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belt cleaning
– Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
– Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
– Allow it to dry.
– Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automat-
ic belt retractor.
WARNING
● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can im-
pair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
● Check the condition of the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice
that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of
the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialised work-
shop.
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
CAUTION
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
226 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
Accessories and spare parts
Always consult a SEAT dealership before purchasing acces-
sories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safe-
ty.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your vehicle, we recommend that you consult your Technical
Service.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and spare parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories
®
and SEAT Ap-
proved Spare Parts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess
the reliability, safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has not approved. For
this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts
used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency
or are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the driv-
er's control of the vehicle (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-con-
trolled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the Eu-
ropean Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to con-
trol the vehicle itself (e.g. refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan), these
must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declara-
tion).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never
be fitted on the covers, or within the working range, of the airbags. Oth-
erwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Technical modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the
vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components
are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by
the faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
nents, and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable for any damage caused by
modifications and/or work incorrectly performed.
For this reason, we recommend having all work performed by a SEAT Techni-
cal Service using SEAT Original Spare Parts
®
.
227Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
WARNING
Any type of work or modification performed incorrectly on your vehicle
can lead to malfunctions and can cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be
positioned parallel to the roof.
To fold down
Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.
CAUTION
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile phones and two-way radios
First consult your Technical Service if you wish to use a mobile telephone or
a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of 10 watts.
Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for
retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a special-
ised workshop, for example a SEAT dealership.
WARNING
● Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while
driving you could have an accident.
● Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the
airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of
injury if the airbag is triggered.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone/two-
way radio.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
228 Checking and refilling levels
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
Fig. 159 Tank flap open
The tank flap is released manually and is located at the rear of the
vehicle on the right.
The tank holds approximately 55 litres. For all-wheel drive vehicles,
the tank capacity is approximately 60 litres.
Vehicles that work with LPG have two fuel tanks: one for LPG and
one for petrol ⇒ page 230.
Opening the fuel tank cap
– Lift the lid.
– Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then insert the key into the
lock and rotate 180° to the left.
– Unscrew the cap, turning it anticlockwise.
Closing the fuel tank cap
– Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a
“click”.
– Turn the key in the lock, without releasing the cap, clockwise
through 180°.
– Remove the key and close the flap until it clicks into place. The
tank cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
soon as the fuel tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this
will fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are
warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of
the fuel tank flap. Here you will find further information on fuel.
229Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
● Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other inju-
ries.
– Never smoke or use an open flame when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion haz-
ard.
– Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.
– For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel can-
ister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident and
leak.
● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canis-
ter, please observe the following points:
– Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec-
trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes
to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on
the ground to fill it.
– Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possi-
ble.
– If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must
be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an
electrostatic charge building up.
– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel
vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
CAUTION
● Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
● Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched
off; this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
230 Checking and refilling levels
LPG system (Liquefied petroleum gas)*
Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL
Refuelling with LPG
Fig. 160 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neck and adapter
Fig. 161 LPG tank in
spare wheel well
Before refuelling, turn off the engine and switch off the ignition and mobile
telephone ⇒
.
Read the instructions on how to use the LPG pump carefully.
Opening the fuel tank cap
The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap, next to the petrol filler neck.
● The tank flap is located on the rear right hand side of the vehicle.
● Open the fuel tank flap.
Refuelling
● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth ⇒ Fig. 160
1
.
● Screw the required adapter
2
on the LPG gas filler neck.
● Refuel as indicated in the pump instructions.
● The fuel tank will be full when the pump compressor automatically cuts
the supply.
● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance, release the button on the
pump to stop the flow.
Closing the fuel tank cap
● Unscrew the adapter of the gas filler neck
2
.
● Screw the cap onto the gas filler neck
1
.
● Close the fuel tank flap. The tap should be flush with the bodywork.
WARNING
Incorrect handling of LPG can cause explosions, fire, serious burns and
other injuries.
● LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance.
● Small quantities of LPG may leak out after refuelling. If LPG comes in-
to contact with the skin there is a risk of freezing.
231Checking and refilling levels
Note
● The vehicle includes the adapter for the country in question, the most
common one. On the whole, we recommend you carry all the adapters in
your vehicle, as some countries use more than one type of filling system.
● If the ambient temperature is very high, the LPG pump protection
against overheating may disconnect this automatically.
● If the outside temperature is very high, the pressure of the LPG tank may
be equal to or greater than that of the gas tank of the LPG pump. In this
case refuelling will be physically impossible.
● The filling nozzles of LPG pumps can differ in the way they are operated.
If you do not know, ask a qualified employee at the petrol station to do the
refuelling.
● Noises heard when refuelling are normal and do not indicate the pres-
ence of a fault in the system.
Adapter for the
An adapter is required due to the existence of a range of
pumps with different nozzles.
Fig. 162 General table of LPG filler neck adapters
ACME adapter (adapter for Europe)
Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy)
Bayonet adapter
EURO adapter (adapter for Spain)
The supply includes the adapter for the country in question, the ACME
1
,
the Dish Coupling
2
, the bayonet
3
or the EURO adapter
4
.
The filler systems and corresponding adapters vary according to country. As
petrol stations abroad do not always have the necessary adapters for your
LPG system, we recommend you purchase the appropriate adapter before
travelling abroad. Check that the adapters are suited to your filling system.
1
2
3
4
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
232 Checking and refilling levels
Note
The four most common types of adapter in Europe are the ACME adapter
1
,
the Dish Coupling adapter
2
, the bayonet adapter
3
and the EURO adapt-
er
4
. On the whole, we recommend you carry all four adapters in your vehi-
cle, as some countries use more than one type of filling system. The intro-
duction of a single system (Euronozzle) throughout Europe is being studied.
Applies to the market: Spanish
Fixed adapter
Fig. 163 Fuel tank flap
open with EURO-type
connector.
The end of the filling tube has a EURO-type connector so that you can refill
LPG without having to use an additional adapter
⇒
Fig. 163.
LPG fuel
LPG is an alternative vehicle fuel and is a blend of propane and butane.
The success of LPG is due to the strict regulations concerning exhaust gas
emissions. Compared to other fossil fuels, LPG is characterised by its re-
duced emissions.
LPG quality and consumption
Quality requirements for LPG are regulated for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and
permit the use of LPG throughout Europe.
A difference is drawn between winter gas and summer gas. Winter gas has a
higher proportion of propane gas. As a result, the driving range of winter
gas may be lower (due to increased consumption) than that of summer gas.
LPG supplier network
The number of LPG pumps is constantly increasing.
Lists of existing LPG pumps may be found on Internet.
LPG safety
A series of collision tests performed on this vehicle while running with LPG
have confirmed its high level of safety.
The safety of the LPG system guarantees operation without risk. The follow-
ing safety measures have been adopted:
● The LPG tank has a solenoid valve which closes automatically when the
engine is switched off (ignition off) or when running on petrol.
● A solenoid type main valve disconnects the supply of gas to the engine
compartment when the engine is switched off or running on petrol.
● A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes to the outside prevents the gas
from entering the vehicle interior.
● All anchorage points and materials have been designed to ensure the
maximum possible levels of safety.
233Checking and refilling levels
The condition of the LPG system should be checked regularly to guarantee
safe driving conditions ⇒
. These checks are included in the Maintenance
Programme.
WARNING
● If there is a smell of gas or a suspected leak, stop the vehicle immedi-
ately and switch off the ignition. Open the doors to ventilate the vehicle.
Do not carry on driving! Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and
have the fault repaired.
● Immediately extinguish any cigarettes and remove from the vehicle
any objects which might produce a spark or cause a fire, and switch off
immediately if gas is smelt or a leak is detected.
● LPG tanks are subject to pressure and must be checked regularly. The
owner of the vehicle must check that these services are performed cor-
rectly.
● When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechani-
cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
For any fault in the LPG system, please refer to the SEAT web page, which
lists the workshops authorised to repair these faults.
Petrol
Petrol types
The recommended fuel types are listed on a sticker inside
the fuel tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol conforming to standard DIN EN 228 may be used for
vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Standard”).
Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
= “Research Octane Number”, unit for determining the knock resistance of
petrol). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one rec-
ommended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
consumption and engine power.
The correct fuel type for your vehicle is given in the technical table for the
engine, in the Technical Data section.
CAUTION
● Petrol with standard EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of etha-
nol. However, bioethanol fuels available at commercial establishments with
reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol, may not
be used, as they will damage the fuel system.
● Even one tankful of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
of the catalytic converter.
● High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
234 Checking and refilling levels
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the fuel influences the behaviour, performance and service
life of the engine.
This is why the petrol you use should carry suitable additives already inclu-
ded by the petrol industry, free of metals. These additives will help to pre-
vent corrosion, keep the fuel system clean and prevent deposits from build-
ing up in the engine.
If good-quality petrol with metal-free additives is not available or engine
problems arise, the necessary additives must be added when refuelling.
Not all petrol additives have been shown to be effective. The use of unsuita-
ble petrol additives may cause significant damage to the engine and the
catalytic converter. Metal additives should never be used. Metal additives
may also be contained in petrol additives for improving anti-detonation rat-
ings or octane ratings.
SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen Group fuel additives for petrol en-
gines”. These additives can be bought at SEAT Authorised Services, where
information on how to use them can also be obtained.
CAUTION
Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the fuel contains metal. LRP (lead re-
placement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Us-
ing them may damage the engine!
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European Standard”). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indi-
cates the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on refuelling ⇒ page 228.
Biodiesel*
CAUTION
● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any cir-
cumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by
the diesel manufacturer in accordance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628
is authorised and will not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
● The diesel engine has been designed to be used exclusively with diesel
fuel conforming to standard EN 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene,
fuel oil or any other type of fuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle with
the wrong type of fuel, do not start the engine. Seek assistance from speci-
alised personnel. The composition of these fuels may severely damage the
fuel system and the engine.
235Checking and refilling levels
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, difficulties may be experienced at
temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F) because the fuel thickens due to wax sep-
aration. For this reason, “winter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some
countries during the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as
-22 °C (-8 °F).
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
has different temperature characteristics. Check with the Technical Services
or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel fuels
available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow plug system, making it well
equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains
operational to approx. -24 °C (-11 °F), provided you use winter-grade diesel
which is safe to -15 °C (+5 °F).
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not
start at temperatures of under -24 °C (-11 °F), simply place the vehicle in a
warm place for a while.
CAUTION
Do not mix fuel additives (thinners or similar products) with diesel fuel.
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the
engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet ⇒ page 237.
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know ex-
actly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work car-
ried out by a specialised workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs
and batteries, are under constant development. SEAT provides a constant
flow of information to the Technical Services concerning modifications. For
this reason, we recommend you to have service fluids and consumables re-
placed by a Technical Service. Please observe the relevant instructions
⇒ page 226. The engine compartment of the vehicle is a hazardous area.
⇒
.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
236 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and
refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the
risk of accident or fire.
● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining
burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the en-
gine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
● Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
● Apply the handbrake and move the gear lever to neutral or selector
lever to position P.
● Keep children away from the vehicle.
● Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
● Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system.
This is a fire hazard.
● Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at
the points where the jump leads are attached ⇒ page 288. The battery
could explode.
● Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could
start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the
key removed from the ignition!
● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the en-
gine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
● Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick
cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
● Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning
cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.
● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A
hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
WARNING (Continued)
● If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with
the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk
from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan,
etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe
the following points:
– Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get trap-
ped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
clothes.
– Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary
precautions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is ap-
plied. Danger of death.
● If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical com-
ponents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the
above warnings:
– Always disconnect the battery from the on-board network. The ve-
hicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be
triggered.
– Do not smoke.
– Never work near naked flames.
– Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
CAUTION
When topping up service fluids, make sure not to mistake them. Using the
wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!
237Checking and refilling levels
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a specialised
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Fig. 164 Detail of foot-
well area on driver side:
lever for unlocking the
bonnet
Fig. 165 Arrester hook
for bonnet
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are
in rest position.
– To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dash panel
⇒ Fig. 164 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
released by a spring action ⇒
.
– Lift the bonnet using the release lever (arrow) and open the
bonnet.
– Release the bonnet stay and secure it in fixture designed for
this in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
238 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING (Continued)
● Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bon-
net, then carefully open the bonnet.
● When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 235.
Closing the bonnet
– Raise the bonnet slightly
– Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
– At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more
and let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving
and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
● After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The
bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
● If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is
moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly.
Risk of accident.
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year
round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essential for the correct operation of
the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use on-
ly those oils that comply with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should ap-
pear on the container of the service oil; when the container displays the
specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the
oil can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change, indicated in the Maintenance Pro-
gramme, be performed by a Technical Service or a specialised workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in the ⇒ page 239,
Oil properties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on
time/distance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the “Maintenance Programme”
booklet is PR QI6, this means that your vehicle has the LongLife service pro-
grammed. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service
is dependent on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been developed which, depending on the
characteristics and individual driving profiles, enable the extension of the
oil change service (LongLife service intervals).
239Checking and refilling levels
Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only
be used observing the following indications:
● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service intervals.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 240 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up
(once) with oil for fixed service intervals ⇒ page 239 (up to a maximum of
0.5 litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife service interval” or it has been
disabled (by request), you may use oils for fixed service intervals, which al-
so appear in ⇒ page 239, Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle must be
serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year/15 000 km (10 000 miles)(whatever
comes first) ⇒ Booklet Maintenance Programme.
● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 240 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you
can put in a small quantity of oil conforming to the specification ACEA A2 or
ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5
l).
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The “Maintenance Programme” states whether your vehicle is fitted with a
diesel particulate filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in die-
sel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will
cause a higher soot concentration and reduce the life of the DPF. Therefore:
● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 240 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you
can use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00,
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up
to 0.5 l).
Oil properties
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible service in-
terval
VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible service inter-
val (LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without Particu-
late filter (DPF)
VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW 507 00
Diesel. Particulate Filter Engines
(DPF).
With or without flexible service in-
terval (with and without Long-
life)
a)
VW 507 00
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle.
This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if nee-
ded.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
240 Checking and refilling levels
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Fig. 166 Engine oil dip-
stick
Checking oil level
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating tempera-
ture is reached and then stop.
– Wait two minutes.
– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
– Then pull it out once more and check the oil level ⇒ Fig. 166.
Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Oil level in area
A
Do not add oil
⇒
.–
Oil level in area
B
You can add oil, but keep the level in this zone.
Oil level in area
C
Oil must be added. Afterwards, the oil level should be in the lined area
B
.
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is
used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely
to be higher for the first 5000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must
be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before
a journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must
be carried out cautiously.
● When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 235.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area
A
do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a Technical Serv-
ice.
–
–
241Checking and refilling levels
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with small quantities of engine oil.
Fig. 167 In the engine
compartment: Engine oil
filler cap
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒
in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 235.
– Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening ⇒ Fig. 167.
– Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
– To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
– As soon as the oil level is in area
B
, carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment illustration
⇒
page 297.
Engine oil specification
⇒
page 238.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot
engine components when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area
A
do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a specialised work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area
A
. Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the ex-
haust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the
service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Serv-
ice.
The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
242 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge
required!
● Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings
⇒ page 235, Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment.
● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by
splashes of oil.
● When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm
horizontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of
the reach of children.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine
damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be
covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
● Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and spe-
cialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil and
filter changed by a Technical Service.
● Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
● Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large
enough to hold all the engine oil.
Coolant
Engine coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially trea-
ted mixture of water and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13 (TLVW 774 J).
The engine coolant additive is recognisable by its purple colour. This mix-
ture of water and additive gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C (-13 F) and protects the light alloy parts of the cooling system against
corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boiling point
of the coolant.
To protect the engine cooling system, the percentage of additive must al-
ways be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is
not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
additive can be increased. However, the percentage of additive should not
exceed 60 %, as this would reduce the frost protection and, in turn, de-
crease the cooling capacity.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and, at
least, 40 % of the G 13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are
purple) to obtain an optimum anticorrosion protection ⇒
. The mixture of
G 13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or G 11 (green-blue) engine
coolants will significantly reduce the anticorrosion protection and should,
therefore be avoided ⇒
.
243Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may
fail leading to serious damage.
● Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with re-
spect to the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which
the vehicle is to be used.
● When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze
and the vehicle would be immobilised. In this case, the heating would
not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not
approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to
the engine and the engine cooling system.
● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example,
brown, this indicates that the G 13 additive has been mixed with an inade-
quate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is
the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are
spilled, they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to
the environment.
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free function-
ing of the engine cooling system.
Fig. 168 In the engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion tank cap
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒
in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 235.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
– Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
– To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the coolant expansion
tank with a thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap ⇒
.
Checking coolant level
– Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
– If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
244 Checking and refilling levels
Topping up coolant
– Only use new coolant liquid.
– Do not fill above the “MAX” mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
– Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the correspond-
ing engine compartment illustration ⇒ page 297.
Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications ⇒ page 242.
Do not use a different type of additive if additive G12+ is not available. In
this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up to the
correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive
⇒ page 242.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be
forced out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
The coolant additive G12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G12 (dyed red)
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must
be carried out cautiously.
● When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 235.
● When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised!
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine
is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
CAUTION
● When mixed with other additives the colour of G12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to
do so will result in engine damage!
● If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down
before putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large cool-
ant losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a special-
ised workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Other-
wise, there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be
mixed with washer fluid.
Fig. 169 In the engine
compartment: Cap of
windscreen washer fluid
reservoir
245Checking and refilling levels
The windscreen washer and the headlight washers are supplied with fluid
from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.
The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We rec-
ommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid. Ap-
proved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please
follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must
be carried out cautiously.
● When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 235.
CAUTION
● Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
● Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per in-
structions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes in
the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Changing windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Fig. 170 Windscreen
wipers in the service po-
sition
Fig. 171 Changing the
front wiper blades
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
246 Checking and refilling levels
To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of
the wipers to the service position.
Service position (For changing wiper blades)
– Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
– Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds
have elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermit-
tent wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the serv-
ice position.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
– Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
– Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of
the arrow ⇒ Fig. 171
Fitting the wiper blade
– Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.
– Slide the blade until it clicks into position.
– Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
The windscreen wiper arms return to their original position when the igni-
tion is turned on and the windscreen wiper lever is operated, or when driv-
ing faster than 6 km/h (4 mph).
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are dam-
aged, or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a special-
ised workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
● The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
CAUTION
● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
● Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually.
This could cause damage.
● Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service
position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.
Note
● The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only
when the bonnet is properly closed.
247Checking and refilling levels
Applies to the model: ALTEA
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Fig. 172 Removing the
rear window wiper blade
Fig. 173 Fitting the rear
window wiper blade
Removing the wiper blade
– Lift the wiper arm away from the glass ⇒ Fig. 172
– Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove
the blade ⇒ Fig. 172.
Fitting the wiper blade
– With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
– Place the blade as shown in the ⇒ Fig. 173 and slide the adapt-
er along until it engages.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or
cleaned if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
● The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
CAUTION
● A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the window.
● Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
248 Checking and refilling levels
Applies to the model: ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Fig. 174 Changing the
rear window wiper blade
Removing the wiper blade
– Lift the rear wiper arm.
– Release the blade by pulling it in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fitting the wiper blade
– Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it
clicks into place.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or
cleaned if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
● The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
CAUTION
● A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the window.
● Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
249Checking and refilling levels
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the serv-
ice schedule.
Fig. 175 In the engine
compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir cover
– Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding en-
gine compartment illustration
⇒
page 297. The brake fluid reservoir has a
black and yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below
the “MIN” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the
instrument panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low
⇒
page 76.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and ob-
serve the warnings ⇒ page 235.
Changing the brake fluid
The Maintenance Programme indicates the brake fluid
change intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Serv-
ice.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings ⇒
in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 235 in
section “Safety notes for working in the engine compartment”.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of
the brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock
which could impair the braking effect.
Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that ex-
pressly meets VW 501 14 standards.
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or SEAT
Official Service. If none is available, use only high quality brake fluid that
meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT
4.
Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that is not of a high quality may
affect operation of the brake system and reduce its effectiveness. Never use
a brake fluid if the container does not state that it complies with VW 501 14,
DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
250 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
● Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and ob-
serve the warnings ⇒ page 235.
● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe
place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
● Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Pro-
gramme. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake
fluid is left in the brake system for too long. This would seriously affect
the effectiveness of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may
cause an accident.
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from
the paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment
The brake pads and brake fluid must be collected and disposed of accord-
ing the applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the
necessary equipment and qualified personnel for collecting and disposing
of this waste material.
Vehicle battery
Warnings on handling the battery
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective
gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when
the battery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as
the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical
system:
● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid
and particles containing lead.
● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye
protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the
vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with
clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralise any acid
splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with
plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
251Checking and refilling levels
WARNING (Continued)
● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When han-
dling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electro-
static charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can
cause injury.
● A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is
under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room
only.
● Keep children away from acid and batteries.
● Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the en-
gine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery
must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only
switch off the light.
● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you
disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
● When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network,
disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
● Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery.
Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never re-
verse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
● Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could
result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which
has frozen. A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0 °C
(+32 °F).
● Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
● Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace
a damaged battery immediately.
CAUTION
● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the en-
gine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic com-
ponents.
● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time,
as the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
● If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-
mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
– Open the engine bonnet and the battery cover ⇒
in Safety in-
structions on working in the engine compartment on page 236
⇒
in Warnings on handling the battery on page 250.
– Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the
battery.
– If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently
until they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram
⇒
page 297.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour,
depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.
There are two different colours:
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
252 Checking and refilling levels
● Black: correct charge status.
● Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a speci-
alised workshop.
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long peri-
ods, the battery should be checked by a specialised workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle,
the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have
the vehicle battery checked by a Technical Service where it will be re-charg-
ed or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and
has special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety
specifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
● We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof
batteries which comply with standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This
standard applies as of 2001.
● Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe
the warnings ⇒
in Warnings on handling the battery on page 250.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordi-
nary household waste.
253Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
– If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and at a right angle.
– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
– Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
– When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the
same direction of rotation when they are installed again.
– When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
– Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres must be run in ⇒ page 204.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of
tyre and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of
the tyres is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by a Techni-
cal Service.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
● New tyres do not have maximum grip during the first 500 km
(300 miles). Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents.
● Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side
when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for dam-
age.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the fuel tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The
values refer to Summer tyres. For winter tyres, you must add
0.2 bar (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) to the values given on the sticker.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
254 Wheels and tyres
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be re-
duced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pres-
sure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting
a journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not re-
duce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres ⇒
.
WARNING
● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre
pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,
there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
● A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema-
turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitoring
The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the
pressure of the tyres.
The system uses the speed sensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by analy-
sing the speed and frequency spectrum of each wheel.
For optimum performance, use genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and
adjust tyre pressures regularly.
Whenever the tyre pressures are changed or one or more tyres are changed,
the system should be Reset by pressing the SET switch on the centre con-
sole.
The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of
symbols and messages in the instrument panel display. The system oper-
ates via the ESC ⇒ page 198.
Note that tyre pressure also depends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure in-
creases about 0.1 bar (2.9 psi / 10 kPa) for each +10 °C (+50 °F) in tyre tem-
perature increase. The tyre heats up while the vehicle is being driven and
the tyre pressure will rise accordingly. For this reason, you should only ad-
just the tyre pressures when they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient
temperature).
To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you
should check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at regular intervals
and store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system.
A tyre pressure information label is attached to the inside of the fuel tank
flap.
255Wheels and tyres
WARNING
● Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres are hot. This may damage
or even burst the tyres. Risk of accident!
● An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and
causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre
bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure
of at least one tyre is insufficient.
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Check the tyre(s).
– Change the wheel if necessary.
Tyre useful life
The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Fig. 176 Tyre tread wear
indicators
Fig. 177 Diagram for
changing wheels
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
256 Wheels and tyres
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
⇒ Fig. 176, running across the tread. Depending on the make, there will be
6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall
(for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the positions of
the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by law is
1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators).
Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export countries
⇒
.
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-
out. For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per
month ⇒ page 253.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisa-
ble to change them around as shown ⇒ Fig. 177. The useful life of all the
tyres will then be about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which re-
sults in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause exces-
sive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be reba-
lanced when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety
of the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel
alignment checked by a Technical Service.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
● The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread wear indica-
tors are worn ⇒ page 256. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a
greater risk of aquaplaning.
● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres-
sures.
● If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear
checked by a Technical Service.
● Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
● Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
257Wheels and tyres
Run-flat tyres
Run-flat tyres allow you to continue driving even with a
punctured tyre, in the majority of cases.
In vehicles that are factory-fitted with run-flat tyres
1)
the loss of tyre
pressure is indicated on the instrument panel.
Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)
– Leave the ESC/ASR on (Electronic Stability Control), or switch it
on ⇒ page 197.
– Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h (50 mph) maxi-
mum).
– Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
– Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
– Pay attention if the ESC/ASR activates often, if smoke comes
from the tyres or there is a smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrates
or there are clattering noises. If any of these occur, stop the ve-
hicle.
The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
“DSST”, “Eufonia”, “RFT”, “ROF”, “RSC”, “SSR” or “ZP”.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km (50 miles) and if the circumstances are fa-
vourable (for example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should
be checked in a specialised workshop to detect possible damage and re-
place it if necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more
than one tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the
distance which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
When loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this means
that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions ⇒
.
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
● smoke is coming from one of the tyres,
● there is a smell of rubber,
● the vehicle vibrates,
● there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?
● If one of the tyres has been severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a
tyre has been badly damaged there is a risk that parts of the tread can be
thrown off and cause damage to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
● It is also advisable to stop driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the
wheel starts overheating and gives off smoke.
1)
Depending upon version and country.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
258 Wheels and tyres
WARNING
When driving in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle
is considerably impaired.
● The maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) is subject to
road and weather conditions. Please observe legal requirements when
doing so.
● Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usu-
al.
● Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
● If one or more tyres are being driven in emergency conditions, the
driving quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.
Note
● The run-flat tyres do not “deflate” on losing pressure because they are
supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre cannot be
detected with a visual inspection.
● Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency condi-
tions.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteris-
tics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and
safe handling
⇒
.
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
Tyre width in mm
Height/width ratio in %
Tyre construction: Radial
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating code
Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
● A direction of rotation symbol
● “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
“DOT... 1103...” means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by a Technical
Service. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary spe-
cial tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of the
old tyres.
Any Technical Service has full information on the technical requirements
when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
On vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four tyres must always be fitted with
tyres of the same type, make and tread pattern, as otherwise the driveline
can be damaged by continuous differences in the wheel speeds. For the
same reason, only use a spare wheel with the same tyre dimensions as the
normal road wheels. You may also use the factory-supplied compact tempo-
rary spare wheel.
195
65
R
15
91
T
259Wheels and tyres
WARNING
● We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been
approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
handling. Risk of accident.
● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If
you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all
times.
● Never use old tyres or those with an unknown history of use.
● If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to
the brakes is not restricted. This could cause the brake system to over-
heat.
● All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country con-
cerned.
Note
● For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
● If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short peri-
od of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as
possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped
bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and
that the brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different
vehicle, even if it is the same model ⇒ page 226.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒
.
The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become
loose while driving. Risk of accident.
● The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or
oil to them.
● Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos-
en whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
CAUTION
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels
is 120 Nm.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
260 Wheels and tyres
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicle's han-
dling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern)
gives less grip on ice and snow.
The winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar (2.9 psi / 20 kPa)
higher than the pressures specified for summer tyres (see sticker on fuel
tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's reg-
istration documentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in
the vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code ⇒ page 258, New tyres and wheels determines the
following speed limits for winter tyres: ⇒
max. 160 km/h (130 mph)
max. 180 km/h (130 mph)
max. 190 km/h (130 mph)
max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Technical Service. The legal requirements of
each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
Q
S
T
H
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
⇒ page 258, New tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Other-
wise, this could lead to tyre damage and risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not
wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains are only permitted on front wheels and only for tyres
195/65R15 and 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-pitch
link chains which do not protrude more than 15 mm
⇒
page 296.
Other tyres may use fine-pitch links which do not protrude more than 9 mm,
including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For
safety reasons cover caps, available in any Technical Service, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
All-wheel drive: Where snow chains are compulsory on certain roads, this
normally also applies to cars with all-wheel drive. Snow chains may only be
fitted to the front wheels (also on vehicles with all-wheel drive).
WARNING
Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manu-
facturer's instructions. This will prevent the chains coming into contact
with the wheel housing.
261Wheels and tyres
CAUTION
Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they
will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.
Note
● In some countries, the maximum permitted speed with snow chains is
50 km/h (31 mph). The legal requirements of each country must be fol-
lowed.
● We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
262 If and when
If and when
Vehicle tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle tools are located under the floor panel in the
luggage compartment.
– Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with
a finger in the fitting.
– Take the vehicle tools out of the vehicle.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
● Jack*
● Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
● Box spanner for wheel bolts*
● Towline anchorage
● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are
optional extras.
WARNING
● The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on
this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or
other loads. Risk of injury.
● Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.
WARNING (Continued)
● Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of acci-
dent.
● If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be se-
cured by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
Compact spare wheel* (temporary spare wheel)
The compact spare wheel (temporary spare wheel for vehi-
cles without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when
strictly necessary.
Fig. 178 Luggage com-
partment. Access to the
spare wheel
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
263If and when
How to use the temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the temporary spare wheel is only
intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The standard-
size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare
wheel. This temporary spare wheel has been specially designed for your ve-
hicle, thus, it cannot be changed with the temporary spare wheel from an-
other vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tem-
porary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains,
fit the compact temporary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels.
You can then attach the snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear and
use this wheel to replace the punctured front wheel.
WARNING
● The tyre pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as possi-
ble after fitting the temporary spare wheel. The temporary spare wheel
pressure for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18 135/90R16 is 4.2 bar
(61 psi / 420 kPa); for all other tyre dimensions please refer to the label
on the fuel cap. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph), since higher speeds can
cause an accident.
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of ac-
cident.
WARNING (Continued)
● Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time,
risk of accident.
● No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on
the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for vehicles not including a temporary
spare wheel) is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre Mobility System (tyre repair kit).
The tyre repair kit consists of a container with sealing product to repair the
puncture and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure. The kit
will reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the pene-
tration of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note
● Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possi-
ble with the sealing product.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
264 If and when
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
– All vehicle occupants should leave the vehicle. They should
wait in a safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barri-
er).
– Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
– If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
– Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in posi-
tion. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
CAUTION
If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below
– Remove the wheel cover. Also refer to ⇒ Fig. 179
– Slacken the wheel bolts.
– Raise the vehicle with the jack at the corresponding area
– Remove the wheel and put on the spare one
– Lower the vehicle.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly with the box spanner
– Replace the hub cap.
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
– Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
265If and when
– Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
– Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as pos-
sible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon
as possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must
be 120 Nm.
Note
● If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt tight-
ening torque checked.
● For safety reasons, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tight-
ening torque has been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the
wheel bolts.
Fig. 179 Changing a
wheel: Removing a hub
cap
Removing
– Insert the extraction hook from the tools into the designated
ring, located in one of the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
⇒ Fig. 179.
– Pull off the hub cap.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
266 If and when
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
– Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
– Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
– Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Fig. 180 Changing a
wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts
Loosening
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it about one full turn to
the left ⇒ Fig. 180.
Tightening
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the
right until it is secured.
– An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft
wheel bolts.
267If and when
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle
with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in
an accident.
Note
● If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised
with a jack.
Fig. 181 Jack position
points
Fig. 182 Fitting the jack
– Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel
to be changed ⇒ Fig. 181.
– Place the jack under the jacking point and turn the crank until
the arm of the jack is directly below the vertical rib under the
door sill.
– Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib un-
der the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat
on the ground ⇒ Fig. 182.
– Raise the jack until the defective wheel is just clear of the
ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points
⇒
Fig. 181. There is only one jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the
jack. Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good sup-
port. Use a large and stable base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface
(such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
268 If and when
WARNING
● Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure
to do so could result in an accident.
● The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct
jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off
suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Jack position points for vehicles with sill panel trim*
Fig. 183 Plastic sill pan-
el trim with jack allot-
ment cover
Vehicles with plastic sill panel trim, with cover*
– Remove the cap
A
to access the anchor point for the vehicle
jack
⇒
Fig. 183.
– Pull on the cover and remove it from its allotment in the direc-
tion of the arrow
⇒
Fig. 183.
– Once the cover has been released, it will remain connected to
its strap so that is not lost.
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must
be completed.
Change the wheel as described below after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Removing a wheel
– Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box spanner and place them
on a clean surface.
Fitting a wheel
– Screw on the wheel bolts in position and tighten them loosely
with a box spanner.
The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These sur-
faces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
269If and when
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Fig. 184 Anti-theft
wheel bolt
– Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go ⇒ Fig. 184.
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
– Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part
of the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from the
SEAT Official Services.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that
they rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to mount the spare wheel so it rotates in the
wrong direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give
optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet
roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)*
General information and safety notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing product and an air compressor are
located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Instructions for the sealing product are located on the sealing compound
container.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
270 If and when
Notes for the proper use of the air compressor are included in an additional
instruction leaflet.
WARNING
● Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing product if the
tyre has been damaged by driving the vehicle after the tyre has lost its
air.
● Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning com-
pressor and sealing compound carefully.
● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph), avoid heavy acceleration,
hard braking and fast cornering.
● Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit-
able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive care-
fully to the next available specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
If you have to dispose of a sealant can, go to a specialised waste service or
to a SEAT Technical Service, where the product can be recycled in an appro-
priate waste container.
Note
● If sealing product should leak out, leave it to dry. This way you can pull it
off like a piece of foil.
● Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the
sealing compound exchanged by a specialised workshop.
● Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possi-
ble with the sealing product.
Preparation work
Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.
– All occupants should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility Sys-
tem “General information and safety notes.”
– Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.
– Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in posi-
tion. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
CAUTION
Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
271If and when
Tyre repair
The following sections describe the procedures for repairing
a tyre.
Using the sealing product
– The instructions on the container give detailed information on
how to use the sealing product.
Inflating the tyre.
– Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.
– Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.
– Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt power socket.
– Turn on compressor and monitor the pressure shown on the
pressure gauge.
Completing the repair
– Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
– Fit the valve cap.
– Unplug the compressor from the socket.
– Return all tools to their proper storing location.
Note
● If the vehicle is equipped with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre
pressures using the SET button on the centre console.
● The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6 mi-
nutes.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
272 If and when
Fuses
Introduction
Due to the constant update of vehicles, fuse assignments depending on
equipment and the use of the same fuse for various electrical components,
at the time of printing this manual it is not possible to provide an up-to-date
summary of the electrical components fuse positions. For detailed informa-
tion about the fuse positions, please consult a Technical Service.
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Like-
wise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a
newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical
system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Additional information and warnings:
● Working in the engine compartment ⇒ page 235
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical
shocks, causing burns and even death!
● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
● Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit with-
out fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.
● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of
the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.
● Never repair a fuse.
● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple or similar.
CAUTION
● To avoid damage to the vehicles electric system, before replacing a fuse
turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the
keys from the ignition.
● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to
another part of the electrical system.
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity.
Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys-
tem.
Note
One single consumer could have more than one fuse.
Note
Several consumers could run over one single fuse.
273If and when
Vehicle fuses
Fig. 185 Left side of
dash panel: fuse box cov-
er
Fig. 186 In the engine
compartment: fuse box
cover
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and
markings) and size.
Identifying fuses situated below the driver-side dash panel by colours
Colour Amp rating
purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
Opening and closing the fuse box situated below the dash panel
● Opening: fold the cover down ⇒ Fig. 185.
● Closing: push back the cover it in until it clicks into place.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
● Open the bonnet ⇒ page 235.
● Press the locking tabs in the direction indicated by the arrows to release
the fuse box cover ⇒ Fig. 186.
● Then lift the cover out.
● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down, in
the opposite direction of that indicated by the arrows, until they click audi-
bly into place.
CAUTION
● Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to
avoid problems with your vehicle.
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity.
Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys-
tem.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
274 If and when
Note
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter.
These should only be changed by a specialised workshop.
Replacing a blown fuse
Fig. 187 Image of a
blown fuse
Preparation
● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical equipment.
● Open the corresponding fuse box ⇒ page 273.
Identifying a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured ⇒ Fig. 187.
Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make it easier to see if the fuse is blown.
To replace a fuse
● Remove the fuse.
● Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same
colour and markings) and identical size ⇒
.
● Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.
CAUTION
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to an-
other part of the electrical system.
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, first turn off the failed component.
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands. The finger-
prints left on the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat generated by the
bulb, causing a reduction in bulb life and condensation on the mirror sur-
face, thus reducing effectiveness.
A bulb must only be replaced by one of the same type. The type is indicated
on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
very least, the following spare bulbs, which are essential for road safety,
should be kept in the vehicle.
Main headlights
- H7
- H1
Dipped beam
Main beam
275If and when
- W5W
- PY21W
Xenon headlights
1)
/adaptive*
- D1S
2)
- P21W SLL
- W5W
- PY21W
Front fog light
- H3
Upper tail light (ALTEA)
- P21W
3)
- R10W
Lower tail light (ALTEA)
- P21W
- P21W
Fixed tail light (ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK)
- P21W
3)
- P21W
Position
Turn signal
Dipped and full beam
Daylight
Position
Turn signals
Front fog light
Stop/Position
Turn signal
Fog light
Reverse light
Stop/Position
Turn signal
Mobile tail light (ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK)
- P21W
- P21W
- W5W
Side turn signal
- W5W
Number plate light
- C5W
Note
● Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the headlights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This
has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly
be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
● Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the inter-
est of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.
● Due to the difficulty in accessing some of the bulbs, any replacement
work should be done by a Technical Service. However, the following is a de-
scription of how to change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior
lamps.
Fog light (driver side)
Reverse (passenger side)
Position
Side turn signal
Number plate light
1)
On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the Technical Service, given
that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made on the
automatic control system incorporated.
2)
The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5 times
more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circumstances,
there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
3)
Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it will
not work in either position or Stop.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
276 If and when
Main headlight bulbs
Fig. 188 Main headlight
bulbs
Turn signal
Dipped beam headlights
Main beam headlights
Side light
A
B
C
D
Turn signal bulbs
Fig. 189 Turn signal bulb
– Raise the bonnet.
– Turn bulb holder ⇒ Fig. 189
A
to the left and pull.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
277If and when
Dipped lights
Fig. 190 Dipped beam
headlights
Fig. 191 Dipped beam
headlights
– Raise the bonnet.
– Move the loops ⇒ Fig. 190
1
in the direction of the arrow and
remove the cover.
– Remove connector ⇒ Fig. 191
2
from the bulb.
– Unclip the retainer spring ⇒ Fig. 191
3
pressing inwards to the
right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
278 If and when
Main beam lights
Fig. 192 Main beam
headlights
Fig. 193 Main beam
headlights
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove the cover ⇒ Fig. 192
C
by pulling on this.
– Remove connector ⇒ Fig. 193
1
from the bulb.
– Press the spring ⇒ Fig. 193
2
inwards and to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly
into the cut-out on the reflector.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
279If and when
Side lights
Fig. 194 Side light
Fig. 195 Side light
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove the cover ⇒ Fig. 194
D
by pulling on this.
– Extract the bulb holder ⇒ Fig. 195
1
outwards.
– Replace the bulb by pulling it out and inserting the replace-
ment.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
280 If and when
Applies to the model: ALTEA
Side lights/ brake lights
Fig. 196 Side lights and
brake lights
Fig. 197 Side lights and
brake lights
– Open the rear lid.
– Remove the bolts ⇒ Fig. 196
A
.
– Remove the cover of the luggage compartment lateral panel.
– Unscrew the plastic fitting ⇒ Fig. 197
B
securing the tail light.
Inserting a screwdriver under the plastic fitting may help to
loosen it.
– Partially remove the tail light from its casing taking care not to
pull on the cable.
– Remove the bulb holder connector.
– Unscrew the bolts ⇒ Fig. 198
C
from the bulb holder and pull
on this.
– Press on the bulb and rotate to the left then fit the replacement.
– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care
when fitting the bulb holder. The metal contacts of the bulb
holder ends should be correctly fitted with respect to the tail
light contacts.
281If and when
Applies to the model: ALTEA
Turn signal light
Fig. 198 Turn signal
Fig. 199 Turn signal
light.
– Remove the diode from its housing ⇒ page 280.
– Unscrew the bolts ⇒ Fig. 198
C
from the bulb holder and pull
on this.
– Pull out the turn signal bulb holder using a screw driver in the
direction of the arrow ⇒ Fig. 199.
– Fit the replacement bulb by pressing it down and rotating to the
left.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
Applies to the model: ALTEA
Reverse light/rear fog light
Fig. 200 Lamp on interi-
or side of bumper
– Rotate the bulb holder to the left, and remove it in the direction
of the arrow ⇒ Fig. 200.
– Replace the bulb by pressing on it and rotating at the same time
to the left
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
282 If and when
Applies to the model: ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK
Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body
Fig. 201 Lights on vehi-
cle body
Fig. 202 Lights on vehi-
cle body
– Open the cover of the luggage compartment side panel
⇒ Fig. 201.
– Turn the bulb holder to the left ⇒ Fig. 202.
– Remove the blown bulb and change it for a new one.
– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care
when fitting the bulb holder.
283If and when
Applies to the model: ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK
Position light, fog light and reverse light on the rear lid
Fig. 203 Lights on the
rear lid
Fig. 204 Side light
Side light
– Open the rear lid.
– Pull the cover off.
– Take the bulb holder out pressing on the securing tabs and ex-
tract it outwards.
– Remove the blown bulb and replace it with another.
– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care
when fitting the bulb holder.
Fog light and reverse light
– Open the rear lid.
– Pull the cover off.
– Turn the bulb holder to the left.
– Remove the blown bulb and replace it with another.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
284 If and when
Side turn signals
Fig. 205 Side turn signal
– Press the turn signal to the left or to the right to remove the
bulb.
– Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal.
– Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
– Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into
place.
– First place the turn signal in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs ⇒ Fig. 205, arrow
1
.
– Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow
2
⇒ Fig. 205.
Luggage compartment lights
Fig. 206 Luggage com-
partment light
Fig. 207 Luggage com-
partment light
– Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside edge -arrow- using the
flat side of a screwdriver ⇒ Fig. 206.
285If and when
– Press the bulb sideways and remove it from its housing
⇒ Fig. 207.
Applies to the model: ALTEA
Registration light
Fig. 208 Number plate
light
Fig. 209 Number plate
light
– Remove the bulb, carefully using the flat side of a screwdriver
as a lever inserted in the crack as shown by the arrow
⇒ Fig. 208.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ Fig. 209.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
286 If and when
Applies to the model: ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK
Registration light
Fig. 210 Number plate
light
Fig. 211 Number plate
light
– Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb ⇒ Fig. 210.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ Fig. 211.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
287If and when
Sun visor light
Fig. 212 Removing sun
visor light
Fig. 213 Removing sun
visor light
– Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of a screwdriver,
as shown in the figure ⇒ Fig. 213.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ Fig. 213.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can
be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufactur-
er's instructions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm
2
for petrol
engines and at least 35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
● The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow
as soon as the positive terminals are connected.
● The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board net-
work.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
288 If and when
How to jump start: description
Fig. 214 Diagram of con-
nections for vehicles
without Start Stop sys-
tem
Fig. 215 Diagram of con-
nections for vehicles
with Start Stop system
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ⇒
.
2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive
+
termi-
nal of the vehicle with the flat battery
A
⇒ Fig. 214.
3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter-
minal
+
in the vehicle providing assistance
B
.
4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: Connect one end of the
black jump lead to the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle pro-
viding assistance
B
⇒ Fig. 214.
– For vehicles with Start-Stop system: Connect one end of the
black black jump lead
X
to a suitable ground terminal, a solid
piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block
⇒ Fig. 215.
5. Connect the other end of the black jump lead
X
to a solid met-
al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. However, connect it to
a point as far as possible from the battery
A
.
6. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into
contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let
it run at idling speed.
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait two
or three minutes until the engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam
headlights (if they are switched on).
289If and when
10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehi-
cle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks
which are generated when the leads are disconnected.
11.When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse or-
der to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
WARNING
● Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 235, Working in the engine compartment.
● The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the
flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on
battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
● Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of
explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and
cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, dan-
ger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
● Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump
leads.
● Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to
the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery
could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
● Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the
fuel system or to the brake line.
WARNING (Continued)
● The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to
touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not
touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
● Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact
with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
● Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
290 If and when
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-start-
ing is preferable ⇒ page 287.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
– Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
– Keep the clutch pressed down.
– Switch the ignition on.
– Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
– As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the
gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the
towing vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
General notes
Please observe the following points if you use a tow rope:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
– Drive slowly at first until the tow rope is taut. Then accelerate
gradually.
– Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
– Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not
working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake sooner than nor-
mal and pressing the pedal gently.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
– Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all times when towing.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow bar. You should only use a
tow rope if you do not have a tow bar.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towline anchorages provided
or a towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexper-
ienced drivers should not attempt to tow.
291If and when
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking
the tow rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of
overloading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must ap-
ply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running,
you will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
● The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h (31 mph).
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
● Put the selector lever into position “N”.
● Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph).
● Do not tow further than 50 km.
● If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note
● Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
● For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
● If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gear-
box, you must raise the driven wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
● If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km (30 miles), the front
wheels should be raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by
a qualified person.
● The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power.
The vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should
be carried out by a qualified person.
● The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer
to the notes on ⇒ page 290, Tow-starting.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
292 If and when
Towline anchorages
Fig. 216 The front right
section of the vehicle:
Fitting the front towline
anchorage
Fig. 217 Fitting the tow-
line anchorage to the rear
of the vehicle
Front towing eye
– Take the towline anchorage from the on-board tool set.
– Remove the cover by pressing down on its left-hand side.
– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in the direction of the
arrow ⇒ Fig. 216.
Rear towline anchorage
– Take the towline anchorage from the on-board tool set.
– Remove the cover by pressing down on its right-hand side.
– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in the direction of the
arrow ⇒ Fig. 217.
After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and put it back in the vehicle tool
kit. Replace the cover on the bumper. The towline anchorage should always
be kept in the vehicle.
293Description of specifications
Technical Specifications
Description of specifications
Important information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation always takes
precedence over the information in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the
standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Mainte-
nance Programme or the vehicle registration documentation shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit-
ted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section
Abbrevia-
tion
Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine
power.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
litres per
100 km
Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km (70 miles).
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km (mile) travelled.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
Abbrevia-
tion
Meaning
CN Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance
of petrol.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
294 Description of specifications
Vehicle identification data
The most important information is given on the identifica-
tion plate and the vehicle data sticker.
Fig. 218 Vehicle data
sticker (luggage compart-
ment)
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.
Identification plate
The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart-
ment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from out-
side the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the
left-hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also
located on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel well, in the lug-
gage compartment and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: ⇒ Fig. 218
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Vehicle type, model, displacement, engine type, finish, engine power
and gearbox type
Engine code, gearbox code, external paint code and internal equipment
code
Optional extras and PR numbers
Consumption values (l/100 km) and CO
2
emissions (g/km)
A
Urban consumption and CO
2
emissions
B
Extra-urban consumption and CO
2
emissions
C
Combined consumption and CO
2
emissions
Information on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The vehicle fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions can be consulted on the
vehicle data sticker in the spare wheel well, inside the luggage compart-
ment and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emission values refer to the weight category
assigned to your vehicle according to the engine and gearbox combination,
as well as the specific equipment fitted, and is only used to compare be-
tween the different models.
1
2
3
4
5
295Description of specifications
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions do not depend only on the per-
formance of the vehicle, they can also differ from the established values de-
pending on other factors such as driving style, road conditions, traffic con-
ditions, environmental conditions, load and number of passengers.
Calculation of fuel consumption
The consumption values have been calculated based on measurements per-
formed or supervised by certified CE laboratories according to the latest ver-
sion of directives 715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more information
consult the European Union Publications Office at EUR-Lex: © European Un-
ion, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) and are valid for the kerb
weight indicated for the vehicle.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors mentioned here, consumption
values can differ from those calculated in the current European regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for
the weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase ⇒
.
WARNING
● Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident.
Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and re-
quirements.
● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight
rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded,
the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to acci-
dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive tri-
als according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 mph) (in
certain circumstances up to 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be differ-
ent in other countries. All data in the official vehicle documentation takes
precedence over these data at all times ⇒
.
Drawbar loads
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket
must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approach-
ing the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the road will
be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
296 Description of specifications
wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar load.
WARNING
● For safety reasons, you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h (50
mph) when towing a trailer. This also applies to countries where higher
speeds are permitted.
● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the
permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. Do not
reduce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres ⇒
.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒
.
The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre
pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,
there is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos-
en while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about
appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
297Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the ve-
hicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, other-
wise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Fig. 219 Diagram for the
location of the various el-
ements
Coolant expansion tank
Windscreen washer reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the compo-
nents mentioned above. These operations are described in the ⇒ page 235.
Overview
You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the tech-
nical specifications as of ⇒ page 293.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
298 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm)
No. of cylinders/capacity
(cm
3
)
Fuel
Running on LPG Running on petrol Running on LPG Running on petrol
4/1595 LPG
Super 95 RON
a)
/
Normal 91
RON
b)
72 (98)/ 5600 75 (102)/ 5600 144/3800 148/3800
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance
ALTEA
(Running on LPG)
ALTEA
(Running on petrol)
ALTEA XL
(Running on LPG)
ALTEA XL
(Running on petrol)
Top speed (km/h) 178 181 178 181
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.2 8.9 9.3 9.0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.8 13.2 14 13.4
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1951 1951 2039 2039
Weight in running order (with driver) 1456 1456 1495 1495
Gross front axle weight 965 967 970 971
Gross rear axle weight 1000 980 1085 1025
Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 720 720 740 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200 1200 1200 1200
299Technical specifications
1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 HP) Start-Stop petrol engine
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/5000 175/1550-4100 4/1197 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL
Top speed (km/h) 184 184
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.3 11.6
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1880 1939
Weight in running order (with driver) 1360 1395
Gross front axle weight 970 980
Gross rear axle weight 980 1025
Permitted roof load 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 680 690
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200 1200
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
300 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm
3
) Fuel
92 (125)/ 5000 200/ 1500-4000 4/1390 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK
Top speed (km/h) 194 194 188
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 7.0 7.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.3 10.5 10.8
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1959 2022 2032
Weight in running order (with driver) 1439 1478 1488
Gross front axle weight 1008 1004 1010
Gross rear axle weight 987 1036 1035
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 710 730 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300 1300 1300
301Technical specifications
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm
3
) Fuel
155 (211)/ 5300-6200 280/ 1700 - 5200 4/1984 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
Performance
ALTEA FREETRACK
Frontwheel drive
ALTEA FREETRACK
Four-wheel drive
Top speed (km/h) 220 218
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.5 5.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.7 7.6
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 2150 2205
Weight in running order (with driver) 1606 1661
Gross front axle weight 1115 1140
Gross rear axle weight 1055 1085
Permitted roof load 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 750 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650 1650
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1650
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
302 Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 66 kW (90 PS) with/without DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm
3
) Fuel
66 (90)/ 4200 230/ 1500-2500 4/1598
Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51
CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL
Top speed (km/h) 172 172
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.1 9.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.8 14.1
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1975 2029
Weight in running order (with driver) 1455 1485
Gross front axle weight 1045 1040
Gross rear axle weight 960 1010
Permitted roof load 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 720 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
303Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) with/without DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/ 4400 250/1500-2500 4/1598
Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51
CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL
Top speed (km/h) 183 183
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8 8.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.4 12.6
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1995 2049
Weight in running order (with driver) 1475 1505
Gross front axle weight 1065 1060
Gross rear axle weight 960 1010
Permitted roof load 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 730 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
304 Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF Start-Stop
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/ 4400 250/1500-2500 4/1598
Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51
CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK
Top speed (km/h) 183 183 177
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8 8.2 8.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.2 12.4 12.6
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1970 2024 2049
Weight in running order (with driver) 1450 1480 1505
Gross front axle weight 1045 1040 1045
Gross rear axle weight 960 1010 1035
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 720 740 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400 1400
305Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm
3
) Fuel
103 (140) / 4200 320/ 1750 - 2500 4/1968
Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51
CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL
ALTEA XL
Four-wheel drive
ALTEA FREETRACK
Four-wheel drive
Top speed (km/h) 201 201 198 193
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.7 6.9 6.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.7 9.8 10.1 10.2
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1985 2034 2132 2159
Weight in running order (with driver) 1465 1490 1588 1615
Gross front axle weight 1065 1070 1090 1110
Gross rear axle weight 955 1020 1080 1070
Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 730 740 750 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500 1650 1650
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1500 1500 1650 1650
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
306 Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm
3
) Fuel
125 (170)/ 4200 350/1750-2500 4/1968
Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51
CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance
ALTEA FREETRACK
Four-wheel drive
Top speed (km/h) 204
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.7
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 2159
Weight in running order (with driver) 1615
Gross front axle weight 1110
Gross rear axle weight 1070
Permitted roof load 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1650
307Technical specifications
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK
Length / Width (mm) 4282/1768 4467/1768 4493/1778
Height at kerb weight (mm) 1546 1575 1615
Front and rear projections (mm) 916/788 913/976 940/977
Wheelbase (mm) 2578 2578 2578
Turning circle diameter (m) 10.7 10.7 10.7
Front/rear
a)
track width (mm) 1525 / 1509
1539 / 1523
1527 / 1506
1541 / 1520
1534 / 1519
1542 / 1527
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Capacities
Fuel tank (I)
Vehicles with front-wheel drive Vehicles with four-wheel drive
55 - Reserve 7 60 - Reserve 8
LPG Fuel tank (I) 39
Windscreen washer fluid container / with headlight washer (I) 3/5.5
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Index
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
AFS (cornering lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Air conditioner
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Air conditioner automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vision mirror
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 131
Deactivating the anti-dazzle function . . . . 131
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Automatic gearbox
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox . 183
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Automatic windscreen wiper/washer . . . . . . . 127
Auxiliary audio input: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
B
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Battery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Brake pedal
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 204
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Bulb changes
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Bulb defect
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 173
309Index
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Central lock button
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Automatic locking system for involuntary
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic speed-dependent locking and
unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Changing gear
see Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Changing gear in tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . 186
Changing the bulbs
Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Changing the main headlight bulbs
Main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Turn signal bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Changing the main headlight lamps
dipped lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Changing the tail light bulbs
Position light, fog light and tail light on the
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Changing the tail lights
Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . 284
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Reverse light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Turn signal, side and brake lights on the
body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . 245
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 251
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Checklist
Seat upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Climatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Climatronic
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Coming/leaving home function . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Compartment for on-board documentation . . 141
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Controls
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Convenience closing
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 243
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Coolant loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Coolant temperature
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
310 Index
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Cornering lights
Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Correct adjustment of front seat head re-
straints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cruise control
Complete system deactivation . . . . . . . . . 195
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D
Danger of fitting a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
daytime running lights
Nordic countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Deactivating front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Deactivating the airbag
Front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Differential lock fault (EDL)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Display (without warning or information texts) 61
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . 10, 11, 12
Driveshaft differential
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Drive wheel traction control system (ASR) . . . 197
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Economical/Environmentally friendly . . . . 206
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with automatic gearbox/DSG automatic
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . 119
E
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electric power steering
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 174
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 198
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . 121, 196
Emergency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Emergency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Emission control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
311Index
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . 235
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Engine fault
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Engine management
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 86
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 172, 198
see also Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 172
Example of menu use
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 69
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Example of the use of the menus
Open the Configuration menu with the MFI
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Open the Configuration menu with the
steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
F
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Flexible service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . 120
Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . 140
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Front drinks holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Front interior light type 1
Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Front interior light type 2
Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . 44
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fuel tank
see Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fuel Tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
G
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
General overview of the engine compartment 297
312 Index
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 136
Adjustment of the head restraint angle . . 136
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Heated rear window
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Hydraulic Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
I
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Information in the multifunction display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Information messages in the display . . . . . . . . 66
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel menu
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Instrument panel menus
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Interval wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
J
Jack position points
for Sill panel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
L
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Load compartment in the luggage compart-
ment
see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 17
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 17
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 177, 230
LPG system
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
LPG System filler neck
Filler neck adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
see also Loading the luggage compartment . .17
Luggage compartment net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 122
Main beam headlights
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Maintenance
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
313Index
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Manual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
MEDIA-IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
MFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . 227
Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment*
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
N
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
O
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Outside temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Overview
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
P
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Parking System Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . 10, 11, 12
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 214
R
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Radio navigation controls on the steering
wheel
Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Rear cup holder
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 115
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Rear window automatic wiper/washer . . . . . . 130
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 286
314 Index
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Reverse gear
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Roll-back function
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Roof storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Run-flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Running in
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
S
Safe- security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Safety notes
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Deactivating front passenger airbag . . . . . . 45
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 137, 139
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Seat belt control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belt tensioner
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Seat upholstery
Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Cleaning and maintenance of natural leath-
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
cleaning the trim fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 296
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particu-
late filter *
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Start-Stop
Activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Starting petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 175
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 175
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . 175
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
315Index
Steering wheel audio controls
Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . 171
Storage compartment
Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Other storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . 145
Storage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 144
Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sun visor
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Switch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Switches
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
T
Tank
Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Tow starting
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Traction control system (ASR)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Trailer
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Trailer turn signals
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 122
Tyre-Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 269
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 263
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tyre pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 269
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tyres useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . 253
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Unlocking and locking
Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Upholstery
Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
V
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Vehicle care
Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Vehicle maintenance
electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . . . . . 222
heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
non-electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . 222
seats with airbag components . . . . . . . . . 222
seats without airbag components . . . . . . 222
synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
trim fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
unheated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
316 Index
Vehicle paintwork
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 214
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Volumetric sensor
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
W
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Warning messages
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 79
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 79
Warning messages in the display . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 216
Water
Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 244
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 296
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 296
Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30
Why should head restraints be correctly adjus-
ted? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21, 30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Windscreen washer fluid
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . 247, 248
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . 235
317Index
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.10.13
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Altea
5P0012720BA
Inglés
5P0012720BA (10.13) (GT9)
Altea Inglés (10.13)
